Home

CRS-300 Manual - Comtech EF Data

Contents

1. Limitations OF hei enr Or tei entendida T E xxii Exclusive REMEGIES etre tt caen eet e reae cuts eee ee a Sy NN AT X areas xxiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION f 1 1 1 1 OVerVie Wii eterne poro 1 1 1 1 1 System Level Block 1 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 1OM Table of Contents Revision 19 1 1 2 CRS 280 280L Functional Schematic eee nennen enne nnne sensn tenens 1 5 1 2 ERS 300 Compatibility 2 1 Pra 1 6 1 3 Description of CRS 300 Features 2 ccsisccccssethiacesssiecessssscaccassitcsedshecceasshtaccausbedssdesheascauebecdesenes 1 7 Lar RrontParnel zz cree pre then re e a a cm eee 1 7 1 3 2 Rear Panel te qe cen e E Rede ede e aee ett uva erae e eere ve qns 1 8 1 3 3 Plug in Module Card Assemblies usssseeesesseeeeeee enne enhn 1 9 1 3 3 1 300 System Controller Card Assembly eese enne nnne 1 9 1 3 3 2 Power Supply Card nennen nnne nnn nnne nnne 1 9 1 3 3 3 Modem Interface Cards north emere rea HP no Ree e Fea ss rS RN 1 10 1 3 3 3 1 625
2. 2 1 2 2 Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure sssscccsssssccccssssceccssssceccessssecesssssccanssssscacsssssseesses 2 2 CHAPTER 3 SWITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS 3 1 3 1 Cabling Connection Types 1 1 itor tror e to nean e nodu ni eonun eran nada sa ou bo e aee nn as aa ee 3 1 3 1 1 Coaxial Cable Connections 5 cuc eicere ette eene etna eene eet rna eee vna eae e ve ee eres 3 1 3 1 11 Toe M 3 2 EUNT RE Lo 3 2 3 1 1 3 3 2 EXON Type 3 2 3 1 15 Type SMA Subminiature Version A cccccccccsssccceessececeessececeeseeececaeeeceeaeeeeeesseeeeeees 3 3 3 1 2 D Subminiature Cable Connections esses esee eene enne nennen nennen nnns 3 3 3 1 3 RJ 45 RJ 48 Cable Connections Son sonene a e n e e nennen 3 3 3 2 CRS 300 User Data Connectors sssesssesosesosesosecsesosecosecosecssecsesosssosesssesossssssosssosssssessssessee 3 4 3 2 1 CRS 230 Controller Connectors esses A A na AER nnns 3 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 3 2 1 1 IF Switch Control Connector DB 25M cccccccccccccececeeecececeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 3 4 3 2 1 2 485 Pass Throug
3. 5 17 CRS 336 JP1 JP2 Jumper Detail As 5 18 CRS 370 HSSI to LVDS TMI Card Jumper Shown 5 19 CRS 300 Front Panel Features ccccccccssssseceeseeeceeseaeeecseaaececseaaeceeseaaececeeaaeeeeseaaeeeeseaaeeeeseaas 6 1 CRS 300 MENU TG isn seventeen reae eint a y one eA aA evo Nea Eee eate 6 6 Networking Loop With Switches ccccsssccccecessessaececcesceeseseaeeeeeesseesesasaeeeeecesseeaaeaeeeesensees A 2 Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers sess A 4 Wired thru for Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers A 5 xiii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Table of Contents MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Figure 4 Wired around For Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using A 5 Figure A 5 Networking Loop Exam le ccccssscccccscsssessnsecesecscsesecaaeeeeecsseesesaeaeeeeecsseeseaaeseeeesesssessaaeeeeess A 6 Figure A 6 Networking Loop Example Simplified cesses A 6 Figure 7 Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or 5 A 8 Figure A 8 Wired thru for Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches
4. 5 28 5 6 2 6 Set thesAlarm Masks 2 nd tights RAN A SARE 5 29 CHAPTER 6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION cccccccssssssssescccccsnscsssseececsecsnsnsssseecsesseanansssseseseooas 6 1 6 1 OVET EW P 6 1 6 11 Front Panel L ED Indicators citro eet dee dene eerte eei aee ee lanea iade 6 2 6 1 1 1 Switch Status LED Indicators amoestas n eene 6 2 6 1 1 2 Modem Status LED Indicators essen eene enne nnne nnne enne 6 3 6 1 2 Front Panel Keypad acide dett metet dii 6 4 6 1 3 Front Panel Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD 6 5 6 1 3 1 5 cett iste ee e tete tette b eet t ete ut te 6 5 6 1 3 2 Menu Str ctUte cre ree Rer XA EX RAE a RE 6 6 6 2 Front Panel Operation mee REN 6 7 6 2 1 SELECT Top Level Menu ee eee eene iet tee eee esee pe eese eve eg oes 6 7 6 2 2 SELECT CONFIG Configuration 6 7 6 221 CONFIG MANUA sh tette areata ee o 6 8 6 2 2 2 CONFIG AUTO AUTO OFF or AUTO ON essen nnnm nnne nnn nennen 6 8 6 2 2 2 CONFIG OPTIONS tret ttam uetus 6 9 6 2 2 3 1 CONFIG OPTIONS PRIORITY sees enne nnne nnne nnn nnne 6 9
5. 3 17 Figure 3 6 que eren e p E tete etes 3 18 Fig re 3 7 Replace the AC FUSES oer edet nee EXER sedes have 3 18 Figure 3 8 Chassis DC Power Interface CRS 250 DC Power Supply 3 19 Fig re 3 9 Apply DC POWST eroe ee reet tette o e AR e SEP Ya eene eA ee Dee EVE te sedentes 3 19 Figure 4 1 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to 280 4 5 Figure 4 2 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to 5 2801 4 6 Figure 4 3 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to 5 350 4 7 Figure 4 4 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 350 to 5 280 4 8 xii 5 300 1 1 Table of Contents Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 4 33 Figure 4 34 Figure 4 35 Figure 4 36 Figure 4 37 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure
6. 7 i 24 F To m i J1 a2 3 3J4 ls J6 W7 15X 9 PIN D FEMALE 4 SPC 9 00 30 126 00 PIN 14 5 E J1 WIRE LIST 15X FROM TO SiGNAL COLOR PAIR 41 1 J2 1 GNO DRAN 1 RED BLK BLU X 3 WHT XI BLK X2 GRN Figure B 7 CDM Qx QxL Standard EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable CA WR11417 1 B 9 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B EIA 485 Cable Termination for CDM Qx QxL Multi Drop Cables DB 9M B 3 5 You may use this EIA 485 Cable Termination to terminate the ends of the standard CA WR11417 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable Figure B 7 or the optional CA RB11423 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable Figure B 10 R2 120 ohm Figure B 8 CDM Qx QxL EIA 485 Cable Termination CA WR11418 1 B 10 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 6 Switch to Modem EIA 485 Null Modem Cable for CDM Qx QxL DB 9M gt DB 9M You may use this cable as part of the Switch to CDM Qx QxL EIA 485 Multi Drop daisy chain Connect one end of this cable to the Switch CRS 230 System Controller 485 Pass Through connector and the other end to one of the DB 9F connectors on either the standard CA WR11417 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable Figure B 7 or the optional CA RB11423 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable Figure B 10 that interconnects the Mode
7. 9 Figure 9 Wired around for Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches A 9 Figure A 10 Point to Multipoint Using Routers ccccccesscececesessesseaecececesssseaaseeeeeeesessesaeaeeeeeesseeeeaaeas A 10 Figure A 11 Wired thru for Point to Multipoint Using Routers sess enne A 11 Figure A 12 Wired around for Point to Multipoint Using A 11 Figure A 13 Point to Multipoint Using Switches ccccccccccccessessnseceeeeecessesseaeseceescesseaaeseeeeseessessaaees A 12 Figure A 14 Wired thru Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic Using Switches Point to Multipoint A 13 Figure A 15 Wired around Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic Using Switches Point to Multipoint ed Pe ora Ge xem E ML Ma ni b T 13 Figure B 1 DCE Conversion Cable EIA 530 to 422 449 B 2 Figure 2 DCE Conversion Cable 1 530 1 35 B 3 Figure B 3 Switch and Modem M amp C Cablle ccccccccccscssssssssssecececsssesnsaesesecesesseseeaeeeeeescesseseeaeseseessesseseaaeees B 4 Figure B 4 CDM 625 A Control Cable 0000069 cccccssccesssceessecessecessesecssececseecesseccaeeeesseceeseeens B 6 Figure B 5 SLM 5650 5650A Control Cable CA WR12136 1 sess nnne nnns B 7 Figure B 6 SLM 5650 5650
8. 0 9 and AZ Query Code and qualifier Response to Command Target to Controller SAM message OK SAM received OK but invalid arguments found SAM message OK but only permitted in Remote mode SDT message OK SDT received OK but invalid arguments SDT message OK but not permitted in current mode SGC message SGC received OK but invalid arguments found SGC message OK but only permitted in Remote mode SID message SID received OK but invalid arguments found SID message OK but only permitted in Remote mode MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Response to query Target to Controller SAM x see Description of Arguments SDT2xx see Description of Arguments SGC OaaaaaaaaaaBNN bbrrMSAPsssssss see Description of Arguments SID XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX see Description of Arguments CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 Arguments for Command or Response to Que Serial Number N A 9 bytes numerical Query only SNO XXXXXXXXX Unit returns its 9 digit serial number see Description of Example SNO 176512523 Arguments Software 4 bytes numerical Query only SWR x xx Revision Unit returns the value of internal software revision installed see Description of in the unit in the form x xx Arguments Example SWR 1 03 Ver 1 03 6 bytes numerical Command or Query TIM message
9. mm 1 9 C _TrafficModem N Modem N Tx Rx en Figure 2 Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers A wired thru Ethernet redundancy example is shown in Figure A 3 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the router does not change because the Ethernet connection is properly rerouted within the CRS 300 from the Traffic Modem to the Redundant Modem A wired around Ethernet redundancy example is shown for the CDM 700 User in Figure A 4 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the router needs to change from the Traffic Modem port to the Redundant Modem port Because of this special router configuration is required for successful operation you may need to consult with the router manufacturer A CAUTION The wired around redundancy approach is not recommended A 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Traffic Modem 1 m St ses mmm uu s Traffic Modem N Redundant Modem offline OEEC E m poner Network CRS 300 Traffic Modem 1 i gs s SS Tx Rx Network 1 eI omm Traffic Modem Sez miim Redundant Modem offline ASS 2 a Figure 3 Wired thru for Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers Traffic Modem 1 Network Traff
10. CA WRO0066 mm 4 yes CA WR12069 1 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 316 TMI 1 7 CA WRO0066 S OL e al tes es jj o Em NI T 4 A 3 t f gt gt 9 uu gt Figure 4 21 Control Y Cables EIA 530 232 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 56 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 305 RMI V Bal G 703 User Data Lo mom em m CA WR12069 1 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 325 7 bo cj m 0 e 74 Y Figure 4 22 Control Y Cables and Balanced G 703 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 57 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 305 RMI 2X PL 0813 8 4 Unbal G 703 User Data b o M Figure 4 23 Control Y Cables and Unbalanced G 703 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 58 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 305 RMI amas L ues 4 n 7 85038006 CA WR12069 1 VV CA WR9189 6 HSSI User Data fcm He Pee 10 d n i J fs CA WR12069 1 oF
11. esses B 23 Figure B 19 Quad E1 GigE Connector Cable 7 B 24 Figure B 20 HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 ccccsscccssecssseccsseceessecesssecesseccaseeecssecesseecesseecaeeeessecensees B 25 Figure B 21 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Y Cable CA 0000073 c cccccssecsecssecssecssecseeessecsaeseseseeeseeeees B 26 Figure B 22 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Cable CA 0000136 cscesccesscesscessceeeeeeeesseeesseesseessasesaeenaees B 27 Figure B 23 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable 0000163 B 28 Figure B 24 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable 0000164 B 29 Figure B 25 CDM 625 A to CRS 350 Multi purpose Cable 0000074 B 30 Figure B 26 Balanced G 703 Data Cable 9 38 6 B 31 Figure B 27 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Balanced G 703 Data Cable CA WR11999 6 B 32 Figure B 28 Optional T1 E1 Adapter CN 0000268 B 33 Figure B 29 CDM Qx QxL Quad E1 Data Cable CA WR13018 1 sese B 34 Figure B 30 CDM 700 G 703 Data Cable CA RF12278 1 cccccssccssssssssssessseecseecsseceecaecsaseeaeeeaeseaeseaeees B 35 Figure
12. 4 66 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 9 CDM 710 Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations e Interface Combinations e Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e User Data Connections CRS 300 to Users 4 67 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 9 CDM 710 Modem Connections 4 9 1 4 9 2 When adding a modem to an operating 1 N system you must take care not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling power up sequence and communication connections must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This information is detailed in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations 1 Traffic modems with differing data types are not supported by the Redundant Modem For example the Switch can not be populated with Traffic modems with ASI and Traffic modes with HSSI 2 Depending on the traffic data type the appropriate jumper settings are provided on the Switch TMI to ensure proper operation for HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 336 TMI See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information Interface Combinations The two plug in interface module s
13. 7 2 7 5 Basic Protocol ee eere causes eno eau saecdensesceedesescdenvedscdscdecsedgnceaseccnsncscdes Cosecesdessececcoesedens 7 3 7 5 1 PacketsStruct re x ui eee ee o te 7 4 735 L1 Start of Packet oerte test nir 7 4 7S2 Target Addressa eon RE SR AT RE 7 5 751 3 Address erronee ge ee ipee e ined igit 7 6 7 5 1 4 Instr ctiommCOGXOe s eere et eve I v OR Nt ev dept 7 6 7 5 1 5 Instruction Code Qualifier nnn a enne nna 7 6 7 5 1 6 Optional Message Arguments isses enne nennen enne terna nasi ss sns 7 7 7 5 1 7 Enid iO Packet nr et RR RR ERES 7 7 7 6 Remote Commands and Queries eee e eren ko aee e npa sess ee FREE e Te ee XE PEE aa E vua 7 8 APPENDIX A ETHERNET NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS 1 1 A 1 A 2 Ethernet Routers VS SWITCHES iccscccccsescadsccesseccescexsccdensedececcsvcssecbesdevcssonssedessodecessesscenssoebeses A 1 A 3 Ethernet Configuration Examples 2 A 3 1 Ethernet Network 2 3 2 Ethernet Redundancy with 5 300 3 3 21 Wired thru COMME CtION cccccccss
14. Peenwetmh i hss runs n For additional symbols see the Warnings Cautions and Notes listed earlier in this Preface European Union RoHS Directive 2002 95 EC This unit satisfies with exemptions the requirements specified in the European Union Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment EU RoHS Directive 2002 95 EC European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91 263 EEC In accordance with the European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91 263 EEC the unit should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications Network CE Mark Comtech EF Data declares that the unit meets the necessary requirements for the CE Mark Product Support For all product support please call 1 240 243 1880 1 866 472 3963 toll free USA xxi CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Preface Revision 19 Comtech EF Data Headquarters http www comtechefdata com Comtech EF Data Corp 2114 West 7th Street Tempe Arizona USA 85281 1 480 333 2200 Warranty Policy Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a specific period from the date of shipment and this period varies by product In most cases the warranty period is two years During the warranty period Comtech EF Data will at its option repair or replace products that prove to be defective Repairs are
15. cccccssssscccecesessssnaecececeeseseeaeaeceeecesseseaaeseeeeecesseseaaeeeesessessesenaees xviii Recommended Standard Designations ener nne xix Safety and CompliantEs issssssisissessssrsisus isnon konnan III xix Electrical Safety and Compliance sees eene nnne enne nnns esent xix Electrical e Rand ads xix Operating Environmient 5 ee RE ete cid tet e eee ve ese etes israe aeaea ie rabii oaae iaa Xix European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC and EN 301 489 1 eee cte eet ot ee eic ER e EB E Rc Pe dS European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 XX European Union Low Voltage Directive LVD 2006 95 xxi European Union RoHS Directive 2002 95 xxi European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91 263 xxi M P xxi Id ger eol c c P xxi Comtech EF Data Headq arters 1 depo oo poaae oo puedo ce pod o to papa ae oo o Ioan sa deae ped T s aoo naa a dona pa dedo pes xxii Warranty Policy
16. ccccccsessssccececesseseneseeeeecesseseaaeseeeeseesseaaeseeeessesseseaaeass 3 15 Table 4 1 CDM 625 A Cable Usage RMI TMI cccscccsssscesscccssseeessececsseceseccsececsseceeseeceseeeeaeeceaaeeeseees 4 21 Table 4 2 CDM 710G 710GL Interface Card 4 62 Table 4 3 CDM 710 Interface Card Combinations eeeessssssesese eene nnne enne nnne nnn nns 4 68 Table 4 4 CDM 700 Interface Card Combinations esses esee nennen nennen nnn niin nns 4 74 Table 5 1 RMI JMP1 Jumper Settings AS 5 11 Table 5 2 CRS 316 JP1 Jumper SEttiNgS ccccccccesssssssscecececesseseseseeeeecesseeeseseeeescesseeaaeeeeeeseesseseaaees 5 13 Table 5 3 CRS 316 JP2 Jumper SCttiNgS ccccccccccessssssscecececessesesseseeeeecesseseeaeseeeessesseeuaeseeeessesseseaaeess 5 14 Table 5 4 CRS 316 through JP6 Jumper Settings ccccessssecccecessessececeeecessessaeseeeeseesseseeaees 5 14 Table 5 5 CRS 320 CRS 340 Jumper Settings cccccccssccesscecsseeeessececssecessecessseecsaecesseecsseeecaeeeesaeceseees 5 16 Table 5 6 CRS 336 Jumper JP1 Settings enne ense nins n nis 5 18 Table 5 7 CRS 336 Jumper JP2 Settings 5 18 Table 5 8 CRS 370 Jumper J2 Settings enne enne enhn
17. CR B Gp CE I zl 1229 3 1 147 C q 9 16 869 42 8 Figure 1 28 CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch 1 21 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 L 17 00 _ 43 18 i I In 13 92 35 36 13 18 33 48 Y LN 5 _ __ eo Cee En 17 68 e OKA O CO CJ O OJ O OO raum e 19 00 48 26 Figure 1 29 CRS 280L L Band IF Switch 1 22 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introducti Revision 19 Figure 1 30 CRS 350 ESC Switch CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 Notes 1 24 Chapter 2 INST
18. Figure A 5 Networking Loop Example Figure A 6 Networking Loop Example Simplified CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 6 Hub to Remotes with Standard Traffic using Routers or Switches Figure A 7 shows hub to remotes configuration with standard Ethernet traffic using routers or switches The routers switches will block broadcasts coming from the hub and remote networks Therefore no broadcast storm can be created or the possibility of having a remote MAC on the Hub networks Link 1 Link 2 Transponder Hub A Footprint A Hub B gt Hub Traffic Modem 1 Router Tx Rx Network or Switch d jl aS Traffic Modem N Qr el miam 1 Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem Tx RX 23 a o r Pr 4 ATI ofer milmm 1751 Network or Switch Traffic Modem TX Rx un G EET wt Figure A 7 Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches Router A wired thru Ethernet redundancy example is shown in Figure A 8 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the router does not change because the Ethernet connection is properly rerouted within the CRS 300 from the Traffic Modem to the Redundant Modem A wired around Ethernet redundancy example for the CD
19. cccccccececececececececececececececececececeseceeeeeeens 4 54 4 7 5 User Data Connections CRS 300 to User eeseessssseseeen nennen enne enses nennen 4 55 4 8 CDM 710G 710GL Modem 4 62 4 8 1 RMI TMI Limitations and 4 62 4 8 2 Interface 4 62 4 8 3 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to 4 63 4 8 4 Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 63 4 8 5 Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 63 4 8 6 User Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 64 4 9 CDM 710 Modem Connections cssccseccssccscccscccsccncccsccesscesccesccnsccssccecceecceaccuecseccacseeees 4 68 4 9 1 RMI TMI Limitations and 4 68 4 9 2 Interface Combihatiohs cnii nre kennen n O ka and aa papa ena Rana ga nga ad Va ka rand ga dna 4 68 4 9 3 Control Cabl
20. de A An P Overhent Date ares 4 BAL DATA n Ret 8 n y 1 EB d b 5M I aus 20 BLASIO E s lt Mate musa a So n ie ii Dala Core Ethernet 28 Alarms J8 Austilory SLM 5650 5650A with optional G 703 Interface card connected to CRS 325 TMI 7 CA WR9038 1 CA WR12136 1 D ead Q J CD Meee UGA 2 Comiats Osla Com J5Erernet SLM 5650 5650A with optional G 703 Interface card connected to CRS 325 TMI 4 Figure 4 17 Control and Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to SLM 5650 5650A Connections shown for RMI amp TMIs 4 and 7 only 4 47 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 SLM 5650 5650A with optional NP Interface card connected to CRS 307 RMI T DO NOT USE PORTS 2 4 TYP b r 4 v hs m 4 q 9 p thn J6 FA b as S To coo ME Of Orp 4 20 homa H Aunay 200 SLM 5650 5650A with optional NP Interface connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 P i 2 3 7 M 108 SLM 5650 5650A with optional NP Interface card connected to CRS 316 TMI 1 PP CATSFF7FTGY Figure 4 18 Control and Data Cables Example 3 CRS 300 to SLM 5650 5650A Connections shown for RMI amp TMIs 1 a
21. 1 qp n ur ssi AMEN a D Q l on lt CDM 625 connected to CRS 325 3 0000072 0000069 E 3 9 y AT ao d Mr 5 Lg xu ay d JI Se PP CATSFF7FTGY ca 2 Figure 4 10 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example G 703 driven Configuration Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 7 and 9 only 4 30 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA 0000121 CDM 625 connected to CRS 310 RMI i 7 1 LI A L did 4 Y Eu AS 4 2X PL 0813 8 CDM 625 connected to CRS 316 TMI 7 san pe 9 TW Sm 109 EP n CDM 625 connected to CRS 340 TMI 5 T Lil AS i a X T at CDM 625 connected to CRS 365D 3 1 2 TES z C m u ES CDM 625 connected to CRS 336 1 M x E OIL Be mu 00 Figure 4 11 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example Quad E1 driven Configuration 4 CA 0000069 Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 7 and 9 only 4 31 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 625 connected to CRS 310 RMI Dd TS EE v ims iva nM gt 4 y s m g A 0000073 I F 4 E p y 2X
22. 4 78 Control and Traffic Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to 700 4 79 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired thru Example 8 1 eese 4 80 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired thru Example 82 sees 4 81 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired around Example 1 4 82 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired around Example 2 4 83 Data Cable Connection Example CRS 300 to 600 4 87 Cabling Example for CDM 600 L to 350 4 89 CDM Qx QxL Serial Communication Configuration 5 7 CDM Qx QxL CRS 300 EIA 485 Scheme essen nnne enne nnn nnne nnn 5 9 CEFD P N PC 11494x RMI PCB CRS 307 shown sese 5 11 CRS 316 EIA 530 TMI Card Jumpers Shown Open enne 5 12 CRS 316 JP1 through JP6 Jumper Detail As Shipped 5 13 CRS 320 EIA 232 EIA 422 TMI Card Jumpers Shown 5 15 CRS 340 EIA 232 422 G 703 TMI Card Jumpers Shown 5 15 CRS 336 HSSI or Ethernet TMI Card
23. RS 485 Multi drop cable MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 MCA Address used by user for Monitor amp Control applications for Switch and modems For the Local Traffic modems use ESA and any back up will be transparent to the M amp C application To address the Redundant modem directly e g to check it is fault free use MCA Address used for comms between Switch and modems set via modem front panels ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range set via Traffic Modem front panels NOTE This EDMAC Hub to Hub is exclusive to the CDM Qx QxL F W Ver 1 6 2 or later Figure C 7 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 485 with CDM Qx QxL Modems EDMAC Hub to Hub C 9 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 C 2 Modem Setup e Local Modem m where m is modem position number 1 through 10 on Switch o Switch RCA 100 x m o Set EDMAC Framing on o Set as EDMAC master o Set with EDMAC Slave Address Range ESA Modem RCA 10 e Distant Modem 1 attached to the Distant end of link to Modem o Remote control address no setting required Remote control not used o Set EDMAC Framing on o Set as an EDMAC slave o Set Slave Address ESA Master ESA 1 e Two Distant Modems a 1 1 configuration Set up the on line modem as for Distant Modem 1 described previously in this sectio
24. sets Poris 24 4 Faults See Table 3 14 for the DB 9F connector pinouts for the Quad E1 User Data Interface connectors J2 and J3 on the CRS 365D TMI Table 3 14 Quad E1 Connector Pair Pinouts Signal Function Ref Des PE Direction S Pont txt Ponso CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 3 CRS 300 Chassis Ground and Power Connections 3 3 1 Chassis Ground Interfaces INSTRUCTIONS REQUIRE THAT YOU MUST ENSURE THE INTEGRITY OF THE PROTECTIVE EARTH AND THAT YOU MUST MAINTAIN THE EQUIPMENT S CONNECTION TO THE PROTECTIVE EARTH AT ALL TIMES CAUTION PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED THE INSTALLATION THE CRS 300 IS DESIGNED FOR CONNECTION TO A POWER SYSTEM THAT HAS SEPARATE GROUND LINE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS THE EQUIPMENT IS NOT DESIGNED FOR CONNECTION TO A POWER SYSTEM THAT HAS NO DIRECT CONNECTION TO GROUND IT IS THEREFORE IMPERATIVE DURING INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION THAT YOU PROPERLY GROUND THE UNIT USING THE GROUND STUD PROVIDED ON THE REAR PANEL OF THE UNIT eres qs Li Was 50 watts 2A contains internal e ET Lc tose CR s2 A a con c a CRS 240 AC Power Supply Module BOTTOM CRS 250 DC Power Supply Module Figure 3 3 CRS 300 Chassis Ground Interfaces Use the 10 32 stud located adjacent to the power interface on the CRS 23
25. CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L Interface Cards 1 10 1 3 3 3 1 1 RMU Cand iit retten eoe eren t RR RC nre aea SEXE NN TR 1 11 1 3 3 3 1 2 TMC IA inrcr eh naa a eve 1 11 1 3 3 3 2 SLM 5650 5650A CDM Qx QxL CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CDM 700 Interface GANAS ree nne 1 12 1 3 3 3 2 1 rre eren n ere 1 13 1 3 3 3 2 2 TMIICardsz irr Ye EP NER RA ER 1 14 1 4 Optional CRS 350 ESC SWitCli eaa ea eroe AA E AEE ARAIA waa 1 15 1 5 Summary of Specifications c6c2 ccccececsecededseadeccscenseceicdecdciedessecesceccecccsecectededeececceedeecsceeescede 1 17 1 5 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Specifications ccccccccccsssssssssceceeecessesscseceeeeseessessaeees 1 17 1 5 2 Modem vs Terrestrial User Data Interface 1 18 1 5 3 CRS 280 and CRS 280L IF Switch Specifications nennen nnns 1 19 1 5 4 CRS 350 ESC Switch nennen enne nnne nian nns 1 19 1 5 5 Dimensional Envelope Details c ccccccccsssssssscecccecsesesesaeceeecesseseesaeeeeecessesesaeeeeeeseesseseaaees 1 20 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION Mec N 2 1 2 1 Unpack and Inspect the Shipment
26. CRS 300 to 4 42 4 6 3 Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to MOCEMS cccccccccccececececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenenenins 4 43 4 6 3 1 Ethernet Traffic Data COMMECtIONS cccccccccccccccccceecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeenenenses 4 44 4 6 3 1 1 Ethernet Bridge Mode via the Optional GbE 4 44 4 6 3 1 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode via the Optional NP 4 44 4 6 4 User Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 44 4 6 5 ESC Data Connections Modems to CRS 350 ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeenenes 4 44 4 6 6 User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User sssseeeeeeeeeeeneeenen enema 4 45 4 7 CDM Qx QxL Modem Connections ccsssssccsssssceccscsscecccssssccacssesecaccesseeaussseeacssssssacsess 4 52 4 7 1 RMI TMI Limitations and 4 52 4 7 2 EIA 485 Connections CRS 300 to MOCeMS ccccccccccccccecesececesceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 52 4 7 3 Control Y Cable Connections CRS 300 to 4 54 4 7 4 Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to MOCEMS
27. OMTECH EF DATA BENI 569 6051 N CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual IMPORTANT NOTE The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published information regarding this product Product specifications are subject to change without prior notice Part Number 30010 Revision 19 gt OMTECH EF DATA BENI e SGS CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual Part Number MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Copyright Comtech EF Data 2014 All rights reserved Printed in the USA Comtech EF Data 2114 West 7th Street Tempe Arizona 85281 USA 480 333 2200 FAX 480 333 2161 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS me iine XI FIGURES 2 XII PREFACE Ge E n C XVII About this EREMO II xvii Related Documents xvii Conventions and Refererlces 10 1es eee oo ei eee eaae uo sanas as aoa unas Sana an pa goa Sog na as Sana an a aaa a sana aaa aa xviii Patents and Trademarks cic aote eere estt et detecte eoe eee dade nne eue eaae pee eed xviii Warnings Cautions and Notes cccccccssssssccecececseseaeseeeeecesseseaaeeeeeescessesaeaeseeecsssesasaeseeeessseseaeaeeeesens xviii Examples of Multi Hazard Notices 0
28. TX D G7 n DET NC ta e a Do 44 op Data Output 3 2 2 7 Unbalanced G 703 4 Port Connectors BNC CRS 345 NE NE 8 8 8 5 50041 User 51002 These BNC female connectors provide the Unbalanced G 703 User Data Interface on the CRS 345 TMI Table 3 10 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors Signal Port 1 Ref P 2 1 Port 2 F WP uL G703Rx ue eT CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 8 HSSI Connector HD 50F CRS 336 370 Trattic Modem intfc TMI CRS 336 CRS 370 TMI p 5 2 9 User Interface Modem Data Interface Dn em Data ar 1 ES 225 7 HSSI RS 232 422 V 35 LVDS Faults Ed See Table 3 11 for the pinouts for the HD 50F SCSI II HSSI User Data Interface connectors 12 on the CRS 336 TMI and J1 on the CRS 370 TMI Table 3 11 HSSI Connector Signal Function HSSlSigna RS f3Circui Circuit Direction RR RARE 227 Receive Timing fi5 fomDCE 328 CE Avaliable CA 1 fomDE 429 _ ReeveDta RD 1 fomDE gt SS 11 36 Oat L mi Ground 14 15 17 Tx Carter Off Noes 18 undsined from DTE ae 44 Signal Ground s Oooo C
29. The Switch address for each CDM Qx QxL Traffic Modem is based on which TMI it is attached to with addresses specified in increments of 100 For example for a Switch with address 0 the CDM Qx L on TMI 1 is assigned address 0100 the TMI 2 address is 0200 and so forth up to address 1000 for TMI 10 n It is important that you understand the addressing scheme before proceeding The RMI uses address 1100 5 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Typical for each modem use the CDM Qx QxL Front Panel menu to configure the COMMS make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the lt gt arrow keys to select the nested Config Remote gt SerialConfig menu e Set Interface to RS 485 AW e Set Format to 8N1 e Set Baudrate to 9600 Baud 2 Press ENT to save your serial configuration settings 3 See Figure 5 2 and Appendix C Addressing Scheme Information for instructions on setting up the EIA 485 RS 485 base address and offset 5 8 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 In this example the EIA 485 offset address does affect Modem 1 so the offset be 0001 to 0099 without affecting other Modems EIA 485 addresses CDM Qx QxL RMI LE iij gt A ios 4 Z Te FA NS 3 Modem 2 RS485 Settings Address 1098 Of
30. TrnsmtData DTEtoModem 3 s sB Shed FG O Notes 1 Receiver Ready is an EIA 232 level control signal on a V 35 interface Do NOT connect signals to these pins they are reserved for use by the redundancy system 3 B signal lines are not used for EIA 232 applications For X 21 operation use the 422 pins but ignore Receive Clock if the modem is DTE and ignore Transmit clocks if the modem is DCE 3 8 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 3 ASI Connectors BNC CRS 325 These BNC female connectors provide the Actuator Sensor Interface ASI User Data Interface on the CRS 325 TMI Table 3 6 ASI Connectors BNC Connector TMICRS 325RefDes Signal Function Direction TAS n 3 2 2 4 8 kHz IDR Connector RJ 45F CRS 330 Faults Comms See Table 3 7 for the RJ 45F connector pinouts This port provides the EIA 422 clock and data for the 8 kHz IDR Engineering Service Channel ESC connector J6 on the CRS 330 TMI Table 3 7 8 kHz IDR ESC Connector Pin Signal Function Name Direction 1 Tx Data SD In 2 Tx Data SD In 3 Rx Data RD Out 4 Tx Clock ST Out 5 Tx Clock ST Out 6 Rx Data RD Out 7 Rx Clock RT Out 8 Rx Clock RT Out CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Re
31. e BNCconnectors labeled J3 Rx on the Switch RMI or J5 Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled Rx J2 on the CDM 710G 710GL s CDI 10 1 plug in module If HSSI is the traffic data type see Figure 4 27 and do these steps to connect and secure the HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 the Switch and each CDM 710G 710GL e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J2 the Switch RMI or J3 on the Switch TMI s to e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J1 HSSI on the CDM 710G 710GL s CDI 60 plug in module Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems To handle Ethernet traffic data you must route the Ethernet data through the Switch like G 703 or HSSI data This method of processing data through the Switch is referred to as wired thru For detailed information on this method see Appendix A ETHERNET NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS in this manual For the wired thru connection see Figure 4 27 and do these steps to connect and secure the CAT5 Data Cable PP CAT5FF7FTGY RJ 45 to RJ 45 7 between the Switch and each CDM 710G 710GL e RJ 45 connector labeled J5 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e RJ 45 connector labeled J1 on the CDM 700 CDI 70 plug in module 4 63 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 8 6 User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic from the external router multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the
32. 11417 1 15 DB 9F SHIELDED EIA 485 Multi Drop standard B 8 CAMWR11418 1 Terminal Terminal B 9 CAMWR11419 1 DB 9M gt DB 9M 6 Null Modem B 10 11423 1 15 DB 9F RIBBON EIA 485 Multi Drop optional CDM Qx QxL 4 20 4 20 4 20 4 20 B 11 CA WR12069 1 HD 15M gt 2X DB 15F 6 Y Control CDM Qx QxL 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 B 12 CA WR12361 1 DB 15F gt HD 15M 6 Control CDM 710G 710GL 4 26 4 27 CDM 710 4 28 4 29 CDM 700 4 30 4 31 4 32 4 33 4 34 4 35 B 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B B 3 1 Switch to Modem Control Cable for CDM 625 A HD 15M DB 9M You may use this control cable to connect the Switch to the CDM 625 A Modem 15 PIN TYPE HD MALE 72 00 3 00 WIRE LIST FROM 1 1 1 2 1 3 LS a es SHIELD ITEM 8 P2 9 En eee eee re a as 1 ge Dj me d Figure B 4 CDM 625 A Control Cable CA 0000069 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 B 6 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 2 Switch to Modem Control Cable for SLM 5650 5650A HD 15M gt HD 15M You may use this control cable to connect the Switch to the SLM 5650 5650A Modems
33. 5 6 1 2 2 Download and Extract the Firmware Update Step Task 1 Download the correct firmware archive file to the User PC temporary folder A Go online to www comtechefdata com B On the Main page under Support Information select the Software Downloads hyperlink You may also click the Support tab and then click the Software Downloads icon from the Support page C On the Software Downloads page click Download Flash and Software Update Files D Onthe Flash amp Software Update Files page select the Modem Accessories hyperlink E the Modems product page select the CRS 300 product hyperlink F Select the appropriate modem specific firmware EXE or ZIP download hyperlink Refer to the table in Sect 5 5 2 1 About Firmware Numbers File Versions and Formats in this chapter for the naming and availability of the firmware download hyperlinks archive files and downloaded image files G Download the archive file to the temporary folder Once the EXE or ZIP hyperlink is selected the File Download window opens and prompts selection of Open or Save 5 23 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Step Task 1 e Click Open to turn over file extraction to the user supplied Utility Application Make sure to extract the cont firmware files to the temp folder created earlier e Click Save to open the Save As window M
34. 6 9 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 n If the CDM Qx QxL configuration includes Carrier in Carrier this HOLDOFF time should be no less than 8 seconds When the Switch is currently backing up a Traffic Modem and that offline modem s fault clears the Switch continues to back it up until another active modem becomes faulted In this case the RESTORE HOLDOFF is the length of time that the originally faulted modem must stay unfaulted before the Switch automatically puts it back online so that the Redundant Modem becomes available to bridge the newly faulted modem 6 2 2 3 3 CONFIG OPTIONS gt ALARM MASK ALARM MASK MODEM ALARMS SW ALARMS AUDIO ENTER Select MODEM ALARMS SW ALARMS or AUDIO and then press ENT The Switch logs and reacts to both its own faults and modem faults Either type of faults may be masked using this submenu In addition an audible buzzer can be enabled as an additional indicator CONFIG OPTIONS gt ALARM MASK gt MODEM ALARMS MODEM ALARM MASK NONE TX RX TX RX ENTER Use the lt gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT You may mask Transmit or Receive Traffic faults or both from being reacted to by the Switch This not only prevents the Switch from performing AUTO mode functions when these modem faults are sensed but also keeps the faults from being logged by the Switch faults is desired it should be done dir
35. DB 15 Male Redundant Modem Intfc RMI J2 f Y J3 Rx Tx G 703 Be Balanced RUJ 4 cj wm HSSI Negative ECL HD 50 Female CRS 310 2 ATEEN On Line To Redundant Modem DB 25 Male Traffic Modem Intfc TMI CRS 320 User Data Interface To MOUSE RS 232 422 V 35 LVDS Faults Comms DB 25 Female DB 25 Male DB 15 Male DB 25 Male RJ 45 Traffic Modem Intfc TMI Faults Comms O m P2 a P1 E Mod e amp G 703 Balanced 1 Rx D G 703 Balanced User Data Interface 2 DB 15 Female 4X BNC Female DB 15 Male B 25 Male RJ 45 G 703 To Traffic Modem Unbal E ics G 703 Balanced DB 15 Female DB 9 Female DB 9 Female Ports 3 amp 4 4X BNC Female Ports 1 amp 2 Traffic Modem Intfc CRS ei User Interface Modem Interface Ports 3 amp 4 Faults DB 9 Male HD 15 Female CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Introduction Figure 1 13 CRS 370 TMI HSSI PL 9034 1 FOR USE WITH CDM 600 L ONLY CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information gt User Interface P1 MN CRS300 IOM Modem Data Interface ee Revision 19 CRS 370 TMI RS 232 422 V 35 LVDS Faults HD 50 Female Depending on the traffic data type the appropriate jumper settings are provided on the TMI to ensure proper operation for RT
36. ENT the Switch Status LED turns RED until the Switch polls each activated modem and correctly programs the bridged modem configuration into the Redundant Modem The Redundant Modem may take several seconds to configure Once this programming completes successfully the RED LED turns GREEN If the LED remains RED you must investigate the problem use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to check the communication status MONITOR COMM STATE or MONITOR SW ALARMS Another option is to view the I O Review the nested MONITOR I O screen Communication is slowed to aid viewing This screen shows the actual messages to and from the modems if there are no responses from a modem check the addressing scheme carefully and verify that your modem communication setups are correct Q Do not leave the Switch in this view To deactivate a modem see Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems 5 6 2 2 Verify Each Active Modem Connection The LEDs are arranged in columns corresponding to each modem and should accurately reflect the status of each Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to verify the modem connections Do these steps Step Task 1 Verify that the Status LED for each modem shows a GREEN light indicating no faults The Switch Status LEDs will reflect each modem s Status LED 2 Verify that the Online LED is lit for all connected TMIs with the modems attached 3 Verify that the Online LED is not lit for the Redundant Modem 4 Verify that
37. In full duplex EIA 485 communication there are two separate isolated independent differential mode twisted pairs each handling serial data in different directions It is assumed that a Controller device a PC or dumb terminal transmits data in a broadcast mode via one of the pairs Multiple Target devices are connected to this pair and all simultaneously receive data from the Controller The Controller is the only device with a line driver connected to this pair the Target devices have only line receivers connected 7 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 7 3 7 4 In the other direction on the other pair each Target has a tri state line driver connected and the Controller has a line receiver connected All the line drivers are held in high impedance mode until one and only one Target transmits back to the Controller Each Target has a unique address and each time the Controller transmits the address of the intended recipient Target is included in a framed packet of data All of the Targets receive the packet but only one the intended will reply The Target enables its output line driver and transmits its return data packet back to the Controller in the other direction on the physically separate pair EIA 485 full duplex summary e Two differential pairs one pair for Controller to Target one pair for Target to Controller e Controller to Target pair
38. Use for Modem F0000092 FW 0000092 CDM 625 A F0000132 FW0000132 CDM 570 L CDM 570A AL F0000090 _Vi t FW0000090 SLM 5650 5650A F0000094 FW0000094 CDM Qx QxL F12807 FW12807 CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 F12520 FW12520 CDM 700 F0000134 FW0000134 CDM 600 L F1435 F1435 All other products The hyperlink naming FAHHHHHH is defined in this table as follows e indicates the four to six digit Firmware Number e Indicates the Maintenance Release Letter e g Rev A of FW Ver 1 1 1 e VHH indicates the Firmware Version Number e g Ver 1 1 1 5 21 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 The firmware download files are available from Comtech EF Data in two archive file formats exe self extracting and zip compressed Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of exe files in this case download the zip file instead If applicable one version prior to the current release is also available for download PKZIP for Windows WinZip or ZipCentral file archiving programs PKZIP for D For additional help with zipped file types refer to the help files provided with the Command line is not supported due to file naming conventions To verify the correct firmware number see Step 2 in Sect 5 5 3 2 1 Getting Started Prepare for the Firmware Download 5 6 1 2 Switch Firmware Update Proced
39. dida e CS amp RS A RTS Um 4 to 3 CDM 625 A Loop Connected i at User DB 25 Connector 4 RTS TIC CDM 625 A Controls Online Modem s 3 to 5 Tx IF mute operation nts CDM 625 A CS A CTS amp RS A JRTS T to 2 a Routed to Online Modem AA 3 to 4 User Interface Jumpers JP3 through JP6 J Setti Control Signal Settings ge Detail Pins Jumped DM DSR CS RS CS CTS N A CDM 625 A RS RTS DM DSR 4 Not Connected 3 Note TMI as shipped DMIDSR CS RS CS CTS 4 to 2 SLM 5650A RS RTS DM DSR qi t Routed to Traffic Modem CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 4 2 EIA 232 422 V 35 Interfaces via the CRS 320 and CRS 340 TMIs Jumpers JP1 and JP2 on the CRS 320 obsolete and CRS 340 TMI cards set the functionality of the control signals DTR DSR and RTS CTS See Figure 5 6 and Figure 5 7 Comtech EF Data ships these TMIs pre set with jumpers JP1 and JP2 open S e M je lt a a z 2 o c 2 g 3 8 gt o 3 N N lt 5 EI 2 o a E 8 S 8 a 4 Sijne4 214811 OL te jee 02 5 CRS 320 Front Panel View Jumper JP2 Jumper JP1 TMI PCB Top View Figure 5 6 CRS 320 EIA 232 EIA 422 TMI Card Jumpers Shown Open
40. do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch CRS 365D TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled 1 1 Control on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Finally do these steps to connect and secure a pair of Data Cables CA 0000136 DB 9F to DB 9M 6 e DB 9M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled Aux G 703 on the Traffic CDM 625 A s and e DB 9M connector labeled P2 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled Balanced G 703 on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 4 3 4 ASI Data Connections If ASI is the driving traffic data type see Figure 4 9 through Figure 4 11 do these steps First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control purposes between the Switch RMI and the Redundant CDM 625 A see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure a pair of PL 0813 8 cables 75 BNC to BNC 8 for data purposes between the Switch RMIs and the Redundant CDM 625 A e connector labeled J3 Tx on the Switch RMI to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI IN on the Redundant CDM 625 A and e connector labeled J2 Rx on the Switch RMI to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI OUT on the Redundant CDM 625 A Then do these steps to connect and secure a pair of PL 0813 8 cables 750 BNC to BNC 8 between
41. gt CRS 350 4 37 B 14 PL 0946 2 500 BNC gt 500 BNC 8 IF Modem gt CRS 280 4 7 IF Modem gt CRS 280 4 7 4 9 ASI Data CDM 625 A 21 15 PL 0813 8 750 BNC 750 BNC 8 4 12 SLM 5650 5650A 4 17 Unbal G 703 Data CDM Ox OxL 121 G 703 Data CDM 710G 710GL 4 26 ASI Data CDM 710 4 28 B 16 CA 0000275 11X DB 9M 8 25 Carrier in Carrier CnC Plus CDM 625 A 4 8 4 9 B 17 CA 0000121 HD 50M gt RJ 45 10 100 Ethernet CDM 625 A 4 10 4 11 B 18 0000072 DB 15F gt DB 9M 6 Bal Unbal G 703 Data CDM 625 A B 15 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 pa CEFD P N DESCRIPTION JSEDTOISURAERIG USED WITH CRS 300 gt git 4 9 10 100 Ethernet CDM 625 A 4 10 4 11 Gigabit Ethernet SLM 5650 5650A 4 16 Quad E1Data CDM Qx QxL 4 25 B 19 PP CAT5FF7FTGY RJ 48 gt RJ 48 7 CDM 710G 710GL 4 27 CDM 710 4 28 Gigabit Ethernet CDM 700 134 4 35 4 9 CDM 625 A 4 10 SLM 5650 5650A 4 16 i HSSI Data CDM Qx QxL 4 24 B 20 CA WR9189 6 HD 50M gt HD 50M 6 CDM 710G 710CL 1 27 CDM 710 4 29 4 31 CDM 700 134 B 21 CA 0000073 DB 15F gt 2X DB 9M 6 Quad E1 Data CDM 625 A n B 22 CA 0000136 DB 9M gt DB 9F Quad E1 Data CDM 625 A 2 B 23 CA 0000163 DB 9M gt 2X DB 15F Quad E1 Data CDM 625 A N A B 24 CA 0000164 DB 9M gt 2X RJ 48 Quad E1 Data CDM 625
42. 2 Ethernet Data Connection Wired around Method Sub Mux 4 28 4 4 4 Data Connections CRS 300 to User sse enne nennen nens sss nasse 4 33 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 4 4 5 Data Connections CRS 350 Engineering Service Channel ESC Switch 4 33 4 4 5 1 ESC Data Connections Modems to CRS 350 ssseseseee ee eene nnns 4 33 4 4 5 2 ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User enne enne nnns 4 33 4 4 6 Operation of the CDM 625 A in CDM 600 L Emulation 4 33 4 4 6 1 Preparing the CDM 625 A for Operation in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode 4 34 4 4 6 2 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems CDM 600 L Emulation dosis i EL sas E M 4 34 4 5 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Modem Connections ccccsssssssseececcccccacsssseecccceecensseseeceeeees 4 38 4 5 1 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems essen 4 38 4 5 2 User Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 38 4 6 SLM 5650 5650A Modem Connections ssssceccccssssssssescecececcecssseececcceccacsseseecececeesacens 4 42 4 6 1 RMI TMI Limitations and 4 42 4 6 2 Control Cable Connections
43. 20 TXA Txroll off alpha factor 21 TCI Tx Data Clock Invert 22 RFQ RxFrequency 23 RFT RxFEC Type 24 RMD Rx Modulation 25 RCR RxFEC Code Rate 26 RDR Rx Data Rate 27 RSI Rx Spectrum Invert 28 RDS RxDescrambler state 29 RDI Rx Data Invert 30 RSW RxSweep Width 31 EBA Eb No Alarm point 32 BCS Rx Buffer clock source 33 RRS Rx Reed Solomon 34 RBS Rx Buffer size enable 35 Rx Data Clock Invert 36 ERF External Reference setting 37 EFM EDMAC Framing mode 38 ESA EDMAC Slave Address range 39 TST Test mode read only 40 Alarm Masks 41 RTS Request To Send control 42 55 Statistics Sample Interval 43 CnC Mode 44 CFO CnC Frequency Offset 45 CSD CnC Min Max Search Delay 46 CRA CnC Re acquisition Time CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 gt For the CDM 600 L modem the code is the hex value of the position of the fault parameter within the MGC configuration code 00 NO ERROR 01 TFQ Tx Frequency 09 TDR Tx Data Rate 12 TFT Tx FEC 13 TRS Tx Reed Solomon type 14 TCR TxFEC Code Rate 15 Tx Modulation 16 TSI Tx Spectrum Inversion 17 TSC Tx Scrambler state 18 TPL TxPower Level 1C AUP AUPC enable 1D APP AUPC parameters 23 TCK TxClock source 24 TXO Tx Carrier state 25 TIT Tx Interface Type 26 TTC TxTernary Code 27 TxFraming Mode 28 TIP Tx IF Impedance 29 RFQ Frequency 31 RDR Rx Data Rate 3A RFT RxFEC Type 3B RRS Rx Reed Solomon type 3C RCR RxFEC
44. 240 Power Supply CRS 240 Power Supply User EIA 232 485 M amp C CRS 300 Data Switch Figure 1 1 Typical Redundancy System Level Block Diagram 1 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 1 2 CRS 280 280L Functional Schematic Figure 1 2 provides an operational schematic for the CRS 280 280L IF Switch TO TO TO TO UPCONVERTER UPCONVERTER UPCONVERTER UPCONVERTER UPCONVERTER UPCONVERTER 0 9 8 5 2 1 a a a a 4 TEST ACCESS Sa FROM FROM FROM TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM 9 9 3 2 1 BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP BACKUP FROM COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND REDUNDANT 0 9 8 5 2 1 BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND 10 9 8 3 2 FROM FROM FROM FROM FROM FROM DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN DOWN CONVERTER CONVERTER CONVERTER CONVERTER CONVERTER CONVERTER 10 9 8 3 2 1 RECEIVE A TO TO TO TO TO TO TO REDUNDANT TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM 10 9 5 5 2 Figure 1 2 CRS 280 280L IF Switch Functional Schematic CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 2 CRS 300 Compatibility Table 1 1 shows the Comtech EF Data modems that are compatible for use with the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch
45. 316 TMI Table 3 4 EIA 232 422 V 35 Connector Pin Generic Signal Function Direction GircuitNo EIAM22530 EI232 e T o o y y 12 Internal TransmitCiock B ModemtoDTE 14 swe sB 11 TransmitCiock 8 DTEtoModem n mB s B a dher o o 10 Receiver Ready 8 ModemtoDTE 1 R B 22 DCEReady B ModemtoDTE DMB 9 Receive Clock B ModemtoDTE s RB o o y y 8 Receiver Ready a _ ModemtoDTE 109 7 SignalGround Request to Send B RSB RSB 6 DCEReay N ModemtoDTE eq 51Nle2 oo o 0 7 _ Receive Clock A s DD SCRA Request to Send A RSA RSA 16 Receive Data s ModemtoDTE RB 15 Internal TransmitClock a Modemtopte 4 sa soma 4 Transmit Data B DTEtoModem 103 f sow SDB o _ __ Notes 1 Receiver Ready is an EIA 232 level control signal on a V 35 interface Do NOT connect signals to these pins they are reserved for use by the redundancy system 3 B signal lines are not used for EIA 232 applications ForX 21 operation use the ElA 422 pins but ignore Receive Clock if the modem is DTE and ignore Transmit clocks if the modem
46. 4 Configure Switch to CDM Qx QxL 1 N Redundancy The Switch to CDM Qx QxL redundancy configuration uses an external 485 multi drop communication cable You can configure the CDM Qx QxL in many different ways i e one to four modulators one to four demodulators a mix of one or more modems etc For a Switch application you should configure the CDM Qx QxL only as one modem consisting of one modulator card and one demodulator card the pair must be grouped to act as a single modem See the CDM Qx QxL Installation and Operation Manual for detailed configuration information As shown in Figure 5 1 Modem 1 resides in Slots 1 and 2 Slots 3 and 4 comprise Modem 2 The Switch can use either modem Modem 2 UNIT STATUS o we arc o Re TRAFFIC tonac move rest move Status Indication Prime Power amp Control 2 2 9 Modem 1 Slot2Demod Sslot4 Demod O TOP Front Panel BOTTOM Rear Panel Schematic Figure 5 1 CDM Qx QxL Serial Communication Configuration Example The CDM Qx QxL chassis has a configurable EIA 485 base address applicable to Modem 1 and an offset that is added to the base address when addressing Modem 2 or greater You must use the CDM Qx QxL Front Panel menu to select the EIA 485 addresses identified on the menus as RS 485 Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select CONFIG gt REMOTE Make sure to press ENTER to save your changes
47. 5 19 xi CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 FIGURES Figure 1 1 Typical Redundancy System Level Block Diagram cccccccsccsssssssececeeseessesseaeceeeessessessaeeeeess 1 4 Figure 1 2 CRS 280 280L IF Switch Functional Schematic sees 1 5 Figure 1 3 CRS 300 Front Panel Features 1 7 Figure 1 4 CRS 300 Rear Panel Configuration Example esses enne 1 8 Figure 1 5 CRS 230 System Controller AS O377 csccccssccesscecssscecssecesseecsseeccsaececseeceeseceaseseaeeeeaeeeesneess 1 9 Figure 1 6 CRS 240 AC Power Supply AS 0376 ccccccssccesssecssseecssecesseecsseeecsaececaeecesseecsseeseaeeeeaeecesneess 1 9 Figure 1 7 CRS 250 DC Power Supply PL 10458 1 ccccescccssscccssecessecceseeecssecessseceeseeesseeserseseeaeeeesneees 1 9 Figure 1 8 CRS 310 RMI PL 9579 1 cccssccssscssecssssesscsessssesessssceescseecseecaeecauecsaeceasceaeseaesseesseessenesenessnes 1 11 Figure 1 9 CRS 320 TMI EIA 232 422 PL 9581 1 isssssesseeeeeen nennen nnn nnne nnne nnn nns 1 11 Figure 1 10 CRS 330 TMI G 703 PL 9033 1 cscescesssesssesesscsescsessaeecseecseecsueceaeceaeceaeseaseeesusessseesenesaes 1 11 Figure 1 11 CRS 340 TMI EIA 232 422 or LVDS or 6 703 1 11 Figure 1 12 CRS 365D TMI E1 1 4 ports PL 12985 2 ccccsccsccssecssecs
48. 60 None EL NN CDI 70 CRS 336 CRS 306 be used as HSSI CDI 60 GigE CDI 70 Redundant Unit Notes 1 The Redundant Modem must have the same interface cards in each slot as any of the Traffic Modems 2 The Traffic Modem must have either the same cards in each slot as any of the other Traffic Modems have or a blank panel installed 3 Interface Slots 1 and 2 are not active simultaneously 4 62 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 8 3 4 8 4 4 8 5 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems The Control Cable CA WR12361 1 provides the serial communication path between the Switch and the modems and controls the modem s external Tx IF mute control line You must always use this cable See Figure 4 26 and Figure 4 27 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WR12361 1 cables between the Switch and each CDM 710G 710GL e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15M connector labeled P1 Alarms on the CDM 710G 710GL Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems If G 703 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 26 and do these steps to connect and secure the pair of BNC PL 0813 8 cables between the Switch and each CDM 710G 710GL e BNCconnectors labeled J4 Tx on the Switch RMI or J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled Tx J3 on the CDM 710G 710GL s CDI 10 1 plug in module to
49. 72 00 3 00 P2 1 P1 6 P2 6 p1 7 p2 7 dg P1 8 2 8 Figure 5 SLM 5650 5650A Control Cable CA WR12136 1 B 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 3 Switch to Modem Optional Y Control Cable for SLM 5650 5650A HD 15M HD 15M DB 9F You may use this optional Y control cable purchased separately in place of the CA WR12136 1 cable Figure B 5 to allow User access to the AGC and 180 outputs of the Modem It connects the Switch RMI TMI to the SLM 5650 5650A Modems 72 00 3 00 TWISTED X P1 1 P2 1 P3 8 6 00 25 2 6 3 3 22 7 1 7 2 7 3 1 TYPE D FEMALE Pi 8 P2 8 P1 4 1 5 P1 9 P1 10 P1 11 P1 12 Pi 13 Pi 14 P1 P2 Pi 15 15 PIN 15 PIN DB 9 P3 MALE MALE User Access Pinout n AGC Mentor 5 8 Ground DeMod 9 PIN Figure B 6 SLM 5650 5650A Y Control Cable CA WR12842 6 B 8 MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 4 Switch to Modem Standard 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable for CDM Qx QxL 15X DB 9F You may use this standard Type D 9 pin female Multi Drop cable to daisy chain CDM Qx QxL Modems for communications n You may use the optional CA RB11423 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable Figure B 10 when Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC is not a concern f 3 f Y f xA ia y
50. A N A DB 44M DB 9M gt B 25 CA 0000074 DB 9M DB 15M DB 25F Overhead Data CDM 625 A gt CRS 350 4 13 SLM 5650 5650A 4 17 Bal G 703 Data CDM Qx QxL 4 22 B 26 CA WR9038 6 DB 15F gt DB 15M 6 CDM 600 L 1 36 IDR Data CDM 600 L gt CRS 350 4 37 B 27 CA WR1 1999 6 DB15F gt DB 15M 6 Bal G 703 Data CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL 4 15 B 28 CN 0000268 DB 15M RJ 48 G 703 T1 E1 Data CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L N A B 29 CA WR13018 DB 15F gt 4X RJ 48 6 Quad E1 Data CDM Qx QxL 4 25 B 16 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 App B FIG CEFD P N DESCRIPTION USED FOR TRAFFIC TYPE USED WITH CRS 300 gt REF Ch 4 FIG B 30 CA RF12278 1 DB 9F gt 8X BNC 6 G 703 Data CDM 700 4 30 4 31 4 33 4 35 B 31 CA RF12279 1 DB 15F gt 8X BNC 6 G 703 Data CDM 700 4 30 4 31 4 33 4 35 B 32 CA WR9932 1 DB 9F gt DB 9M 6 Audio Data CDM 600 L gt CRS 350 4 37 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch TO INDICATORS TO 12 TO 13 TO 14 15 Dr d 18 TO 18 25 2 Cn ES MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Switch to Modem Switch to User EIA 232 422 EIA 530 Control and Data Cable DB 25M gt DB 25F You may use this Type D 25 pin cable for EIA 232 422 EIA 530 data connections between the
51. B 31 CDM 700 G 703 Data Cable CA RF12279 1 esesseeeeeeenen ener nnne nnne B 36 Figure B 32 CDM 600 L Audio Data Cable CA WR9932 1 B 37 Figure C 1 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 232 with CDM 625 A 570 A 570L AL 600 E MOG GIS oes AA coi et te emere C 3 xiv CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Table of Contents Figure C 2 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example 600 L Figure C 3 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example Modem Figure C 4 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example Modema Figure C 5 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example Figure C 6 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example Figure C 7 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example HUD tO HUD 0 cece ececstececessteeeeesseeeeessteeeesees MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 External EIA 485 with CDM 625 A 570 A 570L AL External EIA 232 with CDM Qx QxL Modems C 7 External EIA 485 with CDM Qx QxL Modems C 8 External EIA 485 with CDM Qx QxL Modems EDMAC XV CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 xvi About this Manual This manual provides installation and operation information for the Comtech EF Data CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch This document is intended for anyone who installs or op
52. BRIDGE 02 BACKUP AUTO Use the A arrow keys to select an active Traffic Modems the menu skips over any inactive modem slots Press ENT to configure In BACKUP mode the Redundant Modem is online In this case you may not alter the bridge backup state Instead of the MANUAL SELECT menu this message displays MANUAL SELECT SWITCH IS IN AUTO MODE Press CLR or ENT to return to the previous menu The Switch learns and retains the configuration of all of the active modems in the setup The Switch uses this configuration information to program the Redundant Modem to match the configuration of the modem being bridged 6 2 2 2 CONFIG AUTO AUTO OFF or AUTO ON OPERATING MODE AUTO OFF AUTO ON ENTER Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select AUTO OFF or AUTO ON and then press ENT When off MANUAL mode the Switch does not respond automatically to any modem faults and simply performs whatever manual setting you perform via the previous MANUAL SELECT menu 6 8 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 In MANUAL mode the STORED EVENT indicator blinks to alert you that the Switch is effectively not in use The CDM 7XX modems have Faults and Alarms For these modems AUTO Switch Mode will react only to modem Faults modem Alarms will be ignored 6 2 2 3 CONFIG OPTIONS OPTIONS PRIORITY HOLDOFFS ALARM MASK These options define how the Switch will react to various faults
53. CONFIG AUTO menu 2 Select AUTO mode 3 Verify that the Stored Event LED stops blinking 5 6 2 4 Setthe Holdoff Period A holdoff period prevents unwarranted backups due to an intermittent fault In AUTO mode you may introduce additional delays into the backup procedure Do this by setting the number of seconds for holdoff i e the time specified before a faulted Traffic Modem cedes operation to the Redundant Modem backup or operation is returned from the Redundant Modem back to the Traffic Modem restore The process is further explained If a fault occurs in a Traffic Modem and the Redundant Modem operation is fault free backup is initiated once the configured Backup Holdoff Period lapses However if the fault clears within the holdoff s configured timeframe no transfer of operation occurs Similarly if a fault occurs in the Redundant Modem and the Traffic Modem s operation is fault free restore is initiated once the configured Restore Holdoff Period lapses The default holdoff period is 10 seconds a minimum of 1 second and a maximum of 99 seconds is allowed 5 27 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 6 2 5 Set the Backup Holdoff Period If a Traffic Modem fails the Switch waits for the backup holdoff time to determine two things 1 Doesthe Traffic Modem remain faulted and 2 Isthe Redundant Modem not exhibiting the same fault If the answer is
54. CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 5 3 CRS 280 and CRS 280L IF Switch Specifications Return Loss IB retum loss into 750 15 dB return loss into 500 50Q optional Transmit IF Loss Flatness e Tx In To Tx Uplink Out lt 1 5 dB over operating freq lt 0 8 dB 0 5 dB over operating freq BU In To Any Uplink Out lt 1 5 dB over operating freq lt 2 5 dB 1 0 dB over operating freq Receive IF Loss Flatness e Rx Downlink In To Rx Out lt 5 dB over operating freq lt 4 0 dB 0 5 dB over operating freq e Any Downlink In To BU Out lt 5 dB over operating freq lt 5 5 dB 1 0 dB over operating freq Dimensional Envelope Rack Mount 4RU 19W x 2 5D x 7H inches 48 26W x 6 35 x 18H cm e 10 bs lt 4 5416 1 5 4 CRS 350 ESC Switch Specifications Characteristic User Data Interfaces 1 DB 25M Connector ESC overhead signals 1 DB 15F Connector IDR Alarms 1 DB 9F Connector Audio Power 3 Dimensional Envelope 19W x 4 0D x 7H inches Rack Mount 4U 48 26W x 27 5D x 18H cm Weight 5 lbs 2 2 kg CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 5 5 Dimensional Envelopes Details 18 25 463 5 19 00 482 6 Figure 1 27 CRS 300 1 1 Redundancy Switch 1 20 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 i db m
55. CRS 350 to CRS 280 MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Cables and Connections CA WR0066 CRS 350 ESC Switch Rear Panel pp E Te Trotta Te Trath endet Mode ssum gt e e e e e it 8 o B j 1 LJ E e e zs CA WR0066 CRS 280L L Band IF Switch Rear Panel T J CRS CONTROL INTERFACE POWER SUPPLY UJ HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE Dri CMM marora v gt lt 4 A Figure 4 5 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 350 to CRS 280L CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 3 IF Cable Connections e Single Transponder IF Connections e Multiple Transponder IF Connections Using IF Switch CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 3 IF Cable Connections 4 3 1 There are two different possible IF configurations 1 Single Transponder All modems are connected to the same user provided Up Downconverter 2 Multiple Transponders The modems may be grouped and connected in various combinations to multiple Up Downconverters You must
56. D Sub connectors The connector pair features multiple rows of pins male side coupled to mating sockets female side The cable plug and chassis receptacle each feature a D shaped profile that interlock to ensure proper pin orientation and connector seating Either chassis receptacle gender features two jack nuts for secure assembly of the cable plug to the chassis receptacle Whether its gender is male or female the cable plug features two jack screws for secure connection to the jack nuts provided on the mating chassis receptacle The jack screws may be hand tightened or tightened with a standard flat blade screwdriver Connection Instructions Orient the plug to the receptacle in the proper position Press firmly into place Use the jack screws to secure the plug to the receptacle jack nuts Do not over tighten 3 1 3 RJ 45 RJ 48 Cable Connections or RJ 48 jack features a mating slot This design configuration assures gt proper installation and pin orientation D Connection Instructions Press down the tab on the cable plug and then insert the plug into the RJ 4x jack The connection is complete when the tab clicks into position inside the jack The plug for an RJ 45 or RJ 48 cable features a flexible tab The RJ 45 3 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 CRS 300 User Data Connectors Sect 1 4 3 Plug in Module Card Assemblies This section
57. Electrical Safety and Compliance The unit complies with the EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Machines safety standard CAUTION IF THE UNIT IS OPERATED IN A VEHICLE OR MOVABLE INSTALLATION MAKE SURE THE UNIT IS STABLE OTHERWISE EN 60950 SAFETY IS NOT GUARANTEED Electrical Installation CAUTION CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SYSTEM THAT HAS SEPARATE GROUND LINE AND NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT WITHOUT A DIRECT CONNECTION TO GROUND Operating Environment CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT IN ANY OF THESE EXTREME OPERATING CONDITIONS e AMBIENT TEMPERATURES LESS THAN 0 C 32 F OR MORE THAN 50 C 122 F e PRECIPITATION CONDENSATION OR HUMID ATMOSPHERES OF MORE THAN 95 RELATIVE HUMIDITY e UNPRESSURIZED ALTITUDES OF MORE THAN 2000 METRES 6561 7 FEET e EXCESSIVE DUST e FLAMMABLE GASES e CORROSIVE OR EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES xix CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Preface Revision 19 European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC and EN 301 489 1 Independent testing verifies that the unit complies with the European Union R amp TTE Directive its reference to EN 301 489 1 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters ERM ElectroMagnetic Compatibility EMC standard for radio equipment and services Part 1 Common technical requirements and the Declarati
58. Figure 3 9 Apply DC Power To apply DC power to the CRS 300 typical for each module e First plug the user supplied male keyed DC power lead connector into the mating female connector until the lock tab engages Number 18 AWG minimum wires are recommended e Then connect the user supplied DC power leads to the power source CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 Notes 3 20 Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS 4 1 Overview n In order to avoid damage to both the Switch and the modems it is important that you do these steps in sequence First mount the Switch and all modems as instructed in Chapter 2 INSTALLATION Next connect your control IF and traffic data cabling between the powered OFF modems and the Switch as instructed in this chapter Leave the Switch and all modems powered off until all connections are ready Then configure your modems for 1 N redundant operation as instructed in Sect 5 2 Modem Configuration Then if needed configure your Switch RMI TMI cards as instructed in Sect 5 3 RMI Card Configuration Reference and Sect 5 4 TMI Card Configuration Reference Finally once you have properly configured the modems and Switch RMI TMI cards for 1 N redundant operation you should then set the Switch for proper operation using the CRS 300 Front Panel as instructed in Sect 5 5 Swit
59. Indicator Ground Auto On Float Audio Off Ground No Connection Traffic Modem 1 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 2 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 3 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 4 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Unchanged Traffic Modem 5 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 6 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 7 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 8 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 9 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem 10 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 Traffic Modem Online Status Common Common for pins 2 6 and 14 18 Notes 1 Normally open refers to the NON FAILED state 2 Traffic Modem Online Status Open Online Closed Backup N 11 N 9 N e T lt gt 5 4 3 pacto Ester Eze WS J J 2 ed 9 E 7 6 _5 Traffic Modem 3 Online Status Normally Open Note 2 3 2 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 TMI User Data Connectors 3 2 2 1 EIA 232 422 V 35 Connector DB 25F CRS 316 Traffic Modem Inite ORS 315 User Intertace Modem Interface See Table 3 4 for the pinouts of the DB 25F EIA 232 422 V 35 User Data Interface connector J2 on the CRS
60. Interface TMI and Redundant Modem Interface RMI cards that are available for use with the CRS 300 may not use all of these connector types The European EMC Directive EN55022 EN50082 1 requires that you use properly shielded cables for DATA I O These cables must be double shielded from end to end ensuring a continuous ground shield 3 1 1 Coaxial Cable Connections Figure 3 1 show the coaxial cables plugs and their mating connectors jacks sockets that Comtech EF Data uses with their products BNC TNC N F and SMA Connector Type Coupling Type Plug Male Jack Female Bayonet Type BNC shown Threaded ao Type N shown Figure 3 1 Coaxial Connector Examples 3 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 These connectors are available in two coupling styles Bayonet or Threaded e Bayonet Coupling Style The jack has a pair of guideposts that accommodate the plug s lockdown slots This lockdown design provides secure assembly without over tightening the connection e Threaded Coupling Style The jack features external threads The plug shell features internal threads and has either a knurled outer surface to permit hand tightening of the connection or hex flats to accommodate torqued installation Connection Instructions e Bayonet Coupling Connections Use the plug slots to guide then slide
61. Mode 1 byte numerical Priority mode 2 bytes numerical Command or Query Priority mode where xx is 00 priority mode disabled 01 through 10 priority link number The Switch will back up the priority link if Priority mode is enabled A fault occurs on the priority link even if it is already backing up another non priority link Note See Section 7 4 3 for additional information PRI received OK but invalid arguments PRI message OK but not permitted in current mode see Description of Arguments CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Serial based Remote Product Management Command Parameter Type Code and qualifier Retrieve Next 5 unread Stored Events Restore Holdoff Time Arguments for Command or Response to Que 80 bytes 2 bytes numerical Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Query only Switch returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the remote control Reply format cr Sub body cr Sub body cr Sub body cr Sub body cr Sub body where Sub body KLMddmmyyhhmmss K is the fault clear indicator where F Fault C Clear Info L is the faulting clearing unit where the values can be 1 2 9 indicating traffic modems 1 2 9 A modem 10 B Redundant Modem C Switch D Info Mis the fault code where value depends on faulting unit Switch codes are 1 to F indicating t
62. OK TIM hhmmss The time from midnight in the form hhmmss where TIM received OK but see Description of hh hours between 00 and 23 invalid arguments Arguments mm minutes between 00 and 59 and TIM message OK but ss seconds between 00 and 59 only permitted in Remote Example TIM 231259 would be 23 hours 12 minutes and 779 59 seconds from midnight Command Parameter Type Code and qualifier Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Query Response to Command Code and Response to query Target to Controller qualifier Target to Controller CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 Arguments for Command or Response to Que TMI RMI types N A 11 Bytes Query only XMI XXXXXXXXXXY Where x indicates theTMI type detected in each slot see Description of position Arguments 0 none present 1 CRS 320 Rev A 2 CRS 330 3 CRS 340 Rev A 4 CRS 340 Rev B 5 CRS 370 HSSI 6 CRS 320 Rev C 7 Undefined 8 CRS 341 9 CRS 316 A CRS 336 B Undefined C CRS 315 TMI D CRS 325 TMI E CRS 335 TMI F CRS 345 G CRS 365 Quad E1 for CDM Qx H CRS Quad E1 D sub for CDM 625 A y indicates the RMI detected in slot II 0 none present 7 CRS 310 D CRS 307 E CRS 306 F CRS 305 Example XMI 21000000007 Command Parameter Type Cod
63. REMOTE gt REMOTE REMOTE CONTROL BUADRATE INTERFACE PRESS ENTER Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select BAUDRATE or INTERFACE and then press ENT CONFIG REMOTE gt REMOTE gt BAUDRATE REMOTE CONTROL BUADRATE INTERFACE PRESS ENTER You may select the baud rate of the remote control bus connected locally to the M amp C computer Use the lt gt arrow keys to change the baud rate Values of 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 baud are possible Press ENT when done This setting does not affect the internal communications between the Switch and the modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 CONFIG REMOTE gt REMOTE gt INTERFACE The Electronic Industries Association EIA designations supersede the Recommended Standard RS designations ELECT INTERFACE RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W ENT Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select RS232 RS485 2W 2 wire or RS485 4W 4 wire and then press ENT You will be further prompted to enter the bus address In this example EIA 232 mode is used and the bus address is fixed at IN RS232 MODE THE BUS ADDRESS IS FIXED AT 0000 In EIA 485 2 wire or 4 wire mode you may select an address EDIT SWITCH BUS ADDRESS 3000 PRESS ENTER The valid addresses are 1000 3000 5000 and 7000 only as explained in Chapter 7 SERIAL BASED REMOTE PRODUCT MANAGEMENT in this manual This setting does not affect the inte
64. S0 SMO 1 1 an4 NOLLVSS LSRT TII 13NVd LNO IWY 108 540 91 1 eunBi4 908 50 1 enBi4 TI o 9 Zu Jumper JMP1 Location f RMI Front RMI PCB Top View Panel View Figure 5 3 CEFD P N PC 11494x RMI PCB CRS 307 shown Table 5 1 defines the Jumper JMP1 settings as shipped from the factory for each RMI card Table 5 1 RMI JMP1 Jumper Settings As Shipped JMP1 Jumper Setting AS SHIPPED CRS 306 Pins 1 to 2 Jumped CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 4 TMI Card Configuration Reference This subsection shows the modem specific configuration settings for each TMI card Comtech EF Data ships these TMIs with their jumpers pre set for proper operation 5 4 1 EIA 530 Interfaces via the CRS 316 TMI Figure 5 4 shows the CRS 316 TMI CEFD P N PL 12498 Rev A or later Jumpers JP1 through JP6 See Figure 5 5 Tables 5 2 through 5 4 for details 2 Wopo SiCesHO CRS 316 Front CRS 316 PCB Top View Panel View Figure 5 4 CRS 316 EIA 530 TMI Card Jumpers Shown Open Figure 5 5 shows the jumper section of the CRS 316 TMI PCB Comtech EF Data ships these TMIs pre set with jumpers JP1 through JP6 open Table 5 2 Table 5 3 and Table 5 4 define the jumper settings for the modem specific control signal configurations e For CDM 625 A modems
65. Switch FUSES rnemoria a Taa a a a a a a sun 5 20 5 6 Update the CRS 300 Switch Firrmware ssscccsssssccccssssccccssssccccessssecceasssecesssseceessssseaesss 5 21 5 6 1 1 About Firmware Files Naming Versions and Archive Formats 5 21 5 6 1 2 Switch Firmware Update Procedure essen enne nnne nnns 5 22 5 6 1 2 1 Getting Started Prepare for the Firmware Download 5 22 5 6 1 2 2 Download and Extract the Firmware Update 5 23 5 6 1 2 3 Execute the CCCFLASH Upload Utility Application 5 25 5 6 2 Configure the CRS 300 Switch 5 25 vii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 5 6 2 1 Activate the Traffic Modems ssssssssseeeee eene eene enhn ennt enne 5 25 5 6 2 2 Verify Each Active Modem Connection cccccsessscecececessessaececeeecessesnuaeseeeesenssessaaeess 5 26 5 6 2 3 Set the Switch Operation Mode ccccccccccecsssessnsececececeseesnaececeesceesesssaeseeeeseessesssaeess 5 27 5 6 2 4 Set the HOldoft Period cerne edet 5 27 5 6 2 5 Set the Backup Holdoff 5 28 5 6 2 5 1 Set the Restore
66. Switch and Modem or between the Switch and the user data PAIR UP TWISTED PAIRS AS SHOWN WIRE REMAINING TWISTED PAIRS STRAIGHT THRU OVERALL LINK TOGETHER 25 PIN D SHEN 25 PIN TYPE D MALE FEMALE 72 00 90 E E D 4 Figure B 13 EIA 232 422 EIA 530 Control and Data Cable CA WRO066 B 18 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 2 Switch to Modem Modem to User IF Cable BNC 500 Male You may use this 500 BNC cable used to connect the CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch to the Modem 96 00 3 00 HBe MM ef f L TEE Figure B 14 IF Cable BNC 500 for CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch PL 0946 2 B 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 3 Switch to Modem ASI Balanced G 703 IF Cable BNC 750 Male You may use this 750 BNC cable for ASI and Balanced G 703 data connections between the Switch and Modem You may also use this cable to connect the CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch to the Modem Ln 96 00 25 00 Figure B 15 ASI Balanced G 703 IF Cable BNC 750 PL 0813 8 B 20 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 4 Modem to Modem Multi Drop CnC Plus Shielded Data Cable for CDM 625 A 11X DB 9M You may use this Type D 9 pin Multi Drop cable to
67. Switch and each SLM 5650 5650A e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J2 the Switch RMI J3 on the Switch TMI s to e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J7 HSSI on the SLM 5650 5650A If EIA 530 232 is the traffic data type do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for data purposes between the Switch and each SLM 5650 5650A e DB 25M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI or P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled J6 EIA530 on the SLM 5650 5650A Referring to Figure 4 17 If Balanced G 703 is the traffic data type do these steps to connect and secure the CA WR9038 1 cable between the Switch and each SLM 5650 5650A e DB 15M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15F connector labeled J1 Bal Data on the SLM 5650 5650A If Unbalanced G 703 is the traffic data type do these steps to connect and secure the pair of BNC PL 0813 8 cables between the Switch and each SLM 5650 5650A e BNCconnectors labeled J4 Tx on the Switch RMI or J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled J3 Rx on the SLM 5650 5650A and e connectors labeled J3 Rx on the Switch RMI or J5 Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled J2 Tx on the SLM 5650 5650A CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 6 3 1 Ethernet Traffic Data Connections Due to limitations of its backplane
68. Switch to CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L 1 N Redundancy Configure the COMMS for each of the modems via the modem front panel menu note that the menus specify the obsolete Recommended Standard RS designation e g RS 232 rather than the current Electronic Industries Association EIA designation e g EIA 232 Select Configuration gt REMOTE RS 232 9600 baud format 8 N 1 Make sure to press ENTER to save your changes 5 2 4 3 Configure Switch to SLM 5650 5650A 1 N Redundancy 5 2 4 3 1 Configure TTL Switch for All Traffic Data Types The Switch communicates with the SLM 5650 5650A Redundant and Traffic modems via a serial TTL bus contained within the HD 15 J9 Auxiliary connector on the modem rear panel An HD 15M to HD 15F Control Cable connects each modem to the Switch To use 1 N Redundancy you must configure the SLM 5650 5650A communications to TTL Switch in order to communicate with the Switch Use the SLM 5650 5650A Front Panel menu to set the serial interface make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select the nested Select Configuration gt Remote gt SerialConfig menu e Set the Interface to TTL SWITCH e Set the Format to 8N1 e Set the Baudrate to 9600 Baud 2 Press ENT to save your changes 3 Verify that Traffic Modem is ONLINE and the Redundant Modem is OFFLINE See Chapter 5 FRONT PANEL OPERATION in the SLM 5650 or SL
69. Table 1 1 CRS 300 Compatibility Table Modem Optional Switches CRS 280L IF Switch L Band Note 1 nc ME CRS 350 ESC Switch IDR Overhead CDM 570 AWe2 CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140 MHz CDM 5S70L ALNee2 CRS 280L IF Switch L Band CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140 MHz SLM 5650 5650A CRS 280L IF Switch L Band CRS 350 ESC Switch IDR Overhead CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140 MHz n Up to one modulator and one demodulator allowed per CDM Qx CRS 280L IF Switch L Band CDM QxL n Up to one modulator and one demodulator allowed per CDM QxL CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140 MHz CRS 280L IF Switch L Band CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140 MHz ae CRS 350 ESC Switch IDR Overhead n CRS 280L IF Switch L Band CRS 350 ESC Switch IDR Overhead Compatibility Notes 1 The CDM 625 and CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modems with available CDM 600 Emulator Mode serve as operationally transparent replacement units for the CDM 600 L Open Network Satellite Modems 2 The CDM 570A and CDM 570AL Satellite Modems can operate either in legacy CDM 570 Compatibility Mode or in the normal CDM 570A Mode If the CDM 570A AL is in a network of CDM 570 Ls then it will need to be configured for CDM 570 Compatibility mode 3 The CiM 25 Comtech EF Data s low cost Internet Protocol IP Monitor amp Control M amp C interface for existing CEFD modems is not compatible for use on modems operating within a CRS 300 redundan
70. and secure the Data Cable CA 0000072 DB 15F to DB 9M 6 between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled Balanced G 703 on the Traffic CDM 625 A s or For Unbalanced G 703 data only do these steps to connect and secure the pair of PL 0813 8 cables 750 BNC to BNC 8 e connector labeled J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI IN on the Traffic CDM 625 As and e BNC connector labeled J5 Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI OUT on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 4 3 3 G 703 Quad E1 Data Connections If Quad E1 is the driving traffic data type see Figure 4 11 and Figure 4 12 do these steps First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control purposes between the Switch RMI and the Redundant CDM 625 A see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure the Data Y Cable CA 0000073 DB 15F to 2X DB 9M 6 between the Switch RMI and the Redundant CDM 625 A e DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI to 4 23 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 e DB 9F connector labeled Balanced G 703 on the Redundant CDM 625 A using connector on cable and e DB 9F connector labeled Aux G 703 on the Redundant CDM 625 A using P2 connector on cable Then
71. between the Switch and the Redundant CDM 700 e DB 15M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI to e BNCconnectors four connectors per installed CDI 10 card on the Redundant CDM 700 depending on the modem configuration either 4X or 8X BNC connectors are used Next do these steps to connect and secure the CA RF12278 1 cables between the Switch and the Traffic CDM 700 s e DB 9M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 e BNCconnectors four connectors per installed CDI 10 card on each Traffic CDM 700 depending on the modem configuration either 4X or 8X BNC connectors are used If HSSI is the traffic data type see Figure 4 31 and Figure 4 34 and do these steps to connect and secure the HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 between the Switch and each CDM 700 e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J2 on the Switch RMI or J3 on the Switch TMI s to e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled HSSI on each CDM 700 If OC 3 copper is the traffic data type see Figure 4 32 and do these steps to connect and secure the pair of BNC PL 0813 8 cables between the Switch and each CDM 700 e BNCconnectors labeled JA Tx the Switch RMI or J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled Tx on the CDM 700 s CDI 50 plug in module and e BNCconnectors labeled J3 Rx on the Switch RMI or JS Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connec
72. connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data Interface connectors Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the CDM 710G 710GL modems CDM 710G connected to CRS 306 RMI 2X PL 0813 8 2X PL 0813 8 CA WR12361 1 CDM 710G connected to CRS 325 4 CA WR12361 1 2X PL 0813 8 CDM 710G connected to CRS 325 ym E Figure 4 26 Control and Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to CDM 710G 710GL Connections shown for RMI amp TMIs 1 and 3 only 4 64 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 710G connected CRS 306 RMI CA WR12361 1 CA WR9189 6 1 4 User Data K lt asm a CDM 710G connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 CA WR12361 1 CA WR9189 6 S 7 CE m PEL o1 4 a femen K CDM 710G connected to CRS 336 TMI 1 Figure 4 27 Control and Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to CDM 710G 710GL Connections shown for RMI amp TMis 1 and 3 only 4 65 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes
73. data purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next connect and secure the desired serial traffic data cables as described in Sects 4 4 3 2 through 4 4 3 5 Then for each CDM 625 A using Sub Mux connect a user provided CAT5 Ethernet data cable from any one of the four 10 100 Ethernet Bridge Mode ports on the CDM 625 A to one port of a user provided 10 100 1000 Layer 2 Ethernet Switch 4 28 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA 0000121 CDM 625 connected to CRS 310 1 5 o 0 CAIWRO066 FOR ASI ONLY FOR G 703 BAL UNBAL CA 0000072 2X PL 0813 8 CDM 625 connected to CRS 325 TMI 9 EB x CA 0000072 Ww em e emo QAO cU m NA om com i 1 CETE CA 0000072 CA WR9189 6 nee connected to 1 as Sio sd qi 65 Figure 4 9 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example G 703 driven Configuration Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 7 and 9 only 4 29 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA 0000121 i Eum Q6 um FOR ASI ONLY FOR G 703 BAL UNBAL CA 0000072 CA 0000069 CA 0000069 2X PL 0813 8 Ld CDM 625 connected to CRS 325 TMI 9 SEE E c Gu E rx CDM 625 connected to CRS 316 TMI 7
74. iE er egun 2 3 4987 f d peousjeg 04 i W iaag 000 xi xu SGA VZEZSHISE A CZeSH g E ij 5 CRS 340 Front Panel View be It im G 0 0m UNTEN WEWETE coms D a gt o iy unn CRS 340 PCB Top View Figure 5 7 CRS 340 EIA 232 422 G 703 TMI Card Jumpers Shown Open 5 15 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Table 5 5 defines the CRS 320 obsolete and CRS 340 TMI control signal configuration jumper 1 1 and JP2 settings Table 5 5 CRS 320 CRS 340 Jumper Settings Jumper JP1 Jumper JP2 Settings Settings Control Signal Setting Jumpers Pins Pins Jumped Jumped RTS CTS DTR DSR Open Circuit T Open Circuit TMI as shipped TMI as shipped 1 to 3 to 2 RTS to CTS Loop DTR to DSR Loop User Mute Control Connects User DB 25 Pin 23 to Online Modem s 9 to 5 Tx IF Mute 1 MS pP 0 Mute Tx IF Off e 1 No Mute Tx IF On n These jumper settings are possible only on the following TMI versions e For the CRS 320 obsolete Rev F and later versions e For the CRS 340 Rev D and later versions CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 4 3 HSSI Interfaces via the CRS 336 TMI Figure 5 8 and Fig
75. interconnect redundancy enabled CnC CDM 625 A Modems O This cable bypasses the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch P9 10 11 i 1 11X i 9 PIN 30 Se saree 9 SPC 9 00 30 81 00 18 00 30 MALE PIN 1 99 00 RESISTOR JUMPER WIRING WIRE LIST TO COLOR PAIR P7 2 BLU Figure B 16 Multi Drop CnC Plus Shielded Data Cable for CDM 625 A CA 0000275 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 5 Modem to User Ethernet Data Cable for CDM 625 A RJ 45M HD 50M You may use this Ethernet Data cable to connect the Switch CRS 310 RMI to the CDM 625 A 72 00 ESO ia 12345678 RJ 45 MALE 50 PIN Wre Ras TYPE HD lt u MALE 1 L 1x9 11 80 Orange White tracer p p 2 2 50 LE i 3 Rx 4 RD 345 RIT 6 7 Brown White tracer 350 MHz Category 5E Patch Cable Specs 4 Rx 29 RD EIA TIA TSB 40A ETL Verified Contact Gold Plating 50 Short body Assembly Strain Relief Stranded 50dB RoHS Compliant Figure B 17 Ethernet Data Cable for CDM 625 A CA 0000121 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 6 Switch to Modem Balanced G 703 Data Cable for CDM 625 A DB 15F gt DB 15M You may use this cable for Balanced G 703 data conne
76. is DCE 3 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 2 EIA 232 422 N 35 LVDS Connector DB 25F CRS 320 340 Tratlic Modem intic TMi CRS 320 G 703 To Traffic Modem a ww mE NE NEN NN EM 4 User Data Interface To Trattic Modem gt 4 gt nn omm QC a R5 232 122 V 35 LVDS 5 Faults Comms Table 3 5 indicates the pinout for the DB 25F EIA 232 422 V 35 LVDS User Data Interface connector J1 on the CRS 320 TMI obsolete and J2 on the CRS 340 TMI Table 3 5 EIA 232 422 V 35 LVDS Connector Pin Generic Signal Function Direction CincutNo Ela422530 12 Internal Transmit Clock 14 sm 24 TTA SUTEA 3 sB dne Carer on ex eem T ee arc c E O ReciveCick 8 s RB SCRB 8 ReceiverReady a 1 F RRA 8 7 SignalGround CEC 8 5 56 Note 6iNote2 ___ S O 17 _ Receive Clock A s DD SCRA 16 ReciveData RDB 15 Internal Transmit Clock a 14 DB STA soma 4
77. mode the internal link between the Switch and the modems is fixed these examples refer to the old Recommended Standard RS designation rather than the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association EIA e For CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600L modems RS 232 9600 baud 8 N 1 address 0 e For SLM 5650 5650A modems TTL Switch 9600 baud 8 N 1 address N A e For CDM Qx QxL modems RS 485 9600 baud 8 N 1 correct address see Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION The Controller sends a packet with the address of a Target the destination of the packet When the Target responds the address used is the same address to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet The Controller does not have its own address The Comtech SatMac application software Version 3 6 or higher can monitor and control a CRS 300 redundancy system The address scheme details are shown in Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION 7 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 There also are address restrictions for distant end modems being accessed by EDMAC and Comtech transceivers connected either locally or at the distant end of a link See Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION for detailed addressing information and diagrams 7 5 1 3 Address Delimiter This is the forward slash character ASCII code 47 7 5 1 4 Instruction Code This is a three cha
78. networks Sub Mux is a secondary framing structure which combines one to four ports of 10 100 Ethernet IP traffic with any currently available combination of framing and interface type i e HSSI EIA 422 ASI or G 703 but excluding IP itself You must select a specific ratio in order to reference the composite data rate to the modulator and from the demodulator to the primary non IP data interface rate e Chapter 15 IP SUB MUX in the CDM 625 Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM625 e Appendix N IP SUB MUX in the CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM625A You must use the wired around Ethernet connection with the CDM 625 A modem and Switch when you use CDM 625 A Sub Mux mode When you configure Ethernet Bridge Mode for the wired around method this gives full redundancy capability to both selected data types in Sub Mux mode However you must take care to ensure there are no Ethernet network loops or connection problems you should use this method only if the CDM 625 A will be using the Sub Mux In general you may use the wired around approach in a hub to remotes configuration Figure 4 12 depicts the cabling example for a 1 N Redundant system with Traffic modems 3 and 9 configured for IP Sub Mux Do these steps when you use IP Sub Mux with any other traffic data type First connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control
79. redundancy system i e an IP Sub Mux configuration you must use the wired around method explained in Sect 4 4 3 8 2 to make all cabling connections 4 4 3 8 1 Ethernet Data Connection Wired thru Method No Sub Mux n This redundancy approach is the recommended and preferred connection method The wired thru Ethernet connection method is the easiest and simplest choice for Ethernet redundancy This connection method the same one that you use on the standard serial data interface provides a single connection i e using one of four available RJ 45 ports for the User Data Interface and provides simple Form C relays that route the Ethernet connection from your user connection to either the Traffic or Redundant Modem See Figure 4 9 through Figure 4 11 If the wired thru method of Ethernet is the driving traffic data type First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control data purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure the Ethernet Data Cable CA 0000121 HD 50M to RJ 45M 6 between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI e RJ 45F 10 100 Ethernet connector labeled 1 Port1 on the Redundant CDM 625 A to e HD 50M connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI Then connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch CRS 316 or CRS 336 TMI s and the Traffic CDM 625 A
80. s Finally do these steps to connect and secure the 5 Data Cable PP CATSFF7FTGY RJ 45M to RJ 45M 7 between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e RJ 45F connector labeled J5 on the Switch 5 23 to e RJ 45F 10 100 Ethernet connector labeled 1 Port 1 on the Traffic CDM 625 A s O 1 Where the traffic data type is Ethernet you can only use one of four Ethernet ports in Ethernet Bridge Mode on the CDM 625 A rear panel 2 You may use the Switch CRS 316 for single port Ethernet Bridge Mode or EIA 530 but not both at the same time The CRS 316 does not handle Sub Mux operation where the CDM 625 A may use both Ethernet Bridge Mode and EIA 530 simultaneously Sub Mux operation is explained in the next section Sect 4 4 3 8 2 Ethernet Data Connection Wired around Method Sub Mux 4 27 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 3 You may use the CRS 336 for single port Ethernet Bridge Mode or HSSI but not both at the same time The CRS 336 does not handle Sub Mux operation where the CDM 625 A may use Ethernet Bridge Mode and EIA 530 simultaneously Sub Mux operation is explained in the next section Sect 4 4 3 8 2 Ethernet Data Connection Wired around Method Sub Mux 4 4 3 8 2 Ethernet Data Connection Wired around Method Sub Mux While this redundancy approach is not recommended you may use it once you study the LAN and WAN sides of the IP
81. serial number assigned to this unit by Comtech EF Data 6 2 3 2 INFO ID SWITCH ID This screen displays the user defined Switch ID string that is entered via the UTILITY SWITCH ID submenu 6 2 3 3 INFO SETUP wus Asa Soyo 8 10 AUTO OFF BKUP 05 REST 20 This screen displays some of the settings configured in the CONFIG OPTIONS menu Active Traffic Modems are listed on the top line AUTO mode status and the BACKUP and RESTORE HOLDOFF times listed on the bottom 6 2 3 4 INFO IF SWITCH TRANSPONDER SWITCH IS ABSENT This screen displays whether or not a CRS 280 L IF Transponder Switch is connected to the CRS 300 When an IF Switch is present the second line will indicate PRESENT and any offline modem Redundant or Traffic will not have its Tx IF muted by the CRS 300 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 3 5 INFO REMCONT Remote Control Info REM CNTL ON RS232 ADDR 0000 9600 BAUD 8N1 This screen displays if the unit is in LOCAL or REMOTE mode identifies the selected electrical interface type displays the unit address identifies the baud rate and displays the data format 6 2 3 6 INFO MASK Alarm Mask Info ALARMS MASKED MODEM TX MODEM RX LPSU A PSU BN This screen displays the alarms that are currently masked If an alarm is not masked a blank space appears in the relevant screen position Power Supplies A and B cannot be masked at the same ti
82. the CRS 325 TMI s and the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 24 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 e BNCconnector labeled J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI IN on the Traffic CDM 625 A s and e connector labeled J5 Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connector labeled Unbal G 703 ASI OUT on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Finally do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch CRS 325 TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled 1 1 Control on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 4 3 5 EIA 422 Data Connections If EIA 422 is the driving traffic data type see Figure 4 9 through Figure 4 11 First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control data purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to make all connections as per the operating configurations gt When you use the Switch CRS 316 TMI Do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WRO066 for data purposes between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled Data Interface on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Then do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069
83. the Switch and the Modem Pi T P2 i 1 26 P2 26 9 G CNO RFD 1 2 BLK SIGNAL COLOR 1 DRAIN 1 16 2 16 P2 17 WHT 40 EN 72 00 3 00 50 PIN TYPE HD TYPE HD MALE MALE Figure B 20 HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 B 25 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 4 9 Switch to Modem Quad E1 Data Y Cable for CDM 625 A DB 15F 2X DB 9M You may use this cable to connect the Quad E1 data between the Switch CRS 310 RMI and the CDM 625 A Modem P2 E gt a 5 AUX G 703 1 1 L Lo Pe TO RMI 15 PIN TYPE D if FEMALE Ep c 2X 9 PIN TO BAL G 703 TYPE D MALE ur 72 00 3 00 WIRE LIST FROM TO COMMENTS 11 1 P3 4 11 2 J14 P8 TWISTED PAIR J1 3 P3 6 J1 2 J1 4 P3 1 P33 TWISTED PAIR J1 5 P2 5 11 2 314 p2 9 TWISTED PAIR J1 6 P2 7 J1 2 J14 E22 TWISTED PAIR J1 7 J1 8 NIC 11 9 P3 5 J1 2 J1 4 P3 9 TWISTED PAIR J1 10 N C J1 11 P3 7 J1 2 44 9 9 TWISTED PAIR 11 12 2 4 2 4 8 TWISTED PAIR J1 13 P2 6 31 2 J1 4 PDA P2 3 TWISTED PAIR J1 14 NIC J1 15 NIC Figure B 21 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Y Cable CA 0000073 B 26 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 10 Modem to User Quad E1 Dat
84. the Switch can support Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode only 4 6 3 1 1 Ethernet Bridge Mode via the Optional GbE Interface When the SLM 5650 5650A modems are equipped with the optional single port 10 100 1000 Base T GbE plug in module only Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode is possible See Figure 4 16 and do these steps to connect and secure all CAT5 Data Cables PP CATSFF3FTGY e RJ 45 connector labeled J5 on the Switch RMI or TMI to e RJ 45 connector labeled J1 on the optional GbE plug in module 4 6 3 1 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode via the Optional NP Interface 4 6 4 4 6 5 When the SLM 5650 5650A modems are equipped with the optional multi port Network Processor NP plug in module only Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode is possible As shown in Figure 4 18 connect and secure all CAT5 Data Cables PP CAT5FF3FTGY e RJ 45 connector labeled Port 1 on the Switch RMI or TMI to e RJ 45 connector labeled Port 1 the optional Network Processor NP Interface card Do not connect to Port 2 through Port 4 on the Switch RMI TMI or optional n Network Processor NP Interface when operating in Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the external router multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data
85. the other ASCI code 126 device not responding the Switch would generate a response e g 0100 MGC indicating that it had finished waiting for a response and was now ready for further COMs 7 5 1 6 Optional Message Arguments Arguments are not required for all messages Arguments are ASCII codes for the characters O to 9 ASCII codes 48 to 57 A to Z ASCII codes 65 to 90 period ASCII code 46 and comma ASCII code 44 7 5 1 7 End Of Packet e Controller to Target This is the Carriage Return character ASCII code 13 e Target to Controller This is the two character sequence Carriage Return Line Feed ASCII codes 13 and 10 Both indicate the valid termination of a packet 7 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 7 6 Remote Commands and Queries Where Column C Command Column Q Query Columns marked X indicate Command only Query only or Command Query for Instruction Code Instr Page Instr Page Note The following Instruction Code Qualifiers are used in the Response to Command Code 3 Code 3 column see Sect 7 5 1 5 X X T 9 NUE X 7 12 Code Meaning ACT X X 7 9 OPM X X 7 12 Message OK AMQ X 7 9 PRI X X 7 12 BBU X X 7 9 RNE 7 13 Received OK but invalid arguments found BKH X X 7 9 RSH X X 7 13 CAE X 7 9 SAM
86. the permitted settings for jumpers JP1 and JP2 only are o For RTS to CTS Loop Pin 1 to Pin 3 JP1 to JP2 jumped o For RTS to Control TX IF Mute operation for online modem Pin 3 to Pin 5 JP2 jumped e For SLM 5650A modems the settings for jumpers JP1 thru JP6 are o Pin 1 to Pin 2 jumped o Pin 3 to Pin 4 jumped 5 12 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 CDM 625 A JP1 and JP2 used only SLM 5650A JP1 through JP6 used This TMI ships from the factory with jumpers OPEN Figure 5 5 CRS 316 JP1 through JP6 Jumper Detail As Shipped Table 5 2 CRS 316 JP1 Jumper Settings User Interface Jumper JP1 J Setti Control Signal Settings E Ll Pins sumed CS B amp RS B Signals ea Not Connected X Note TMI as shipped CS BtoRS B CDM 625 A Loop Connected at User DB 25 Connector CS B amp RS B b T to 2 Si Routed to online modem 3 to 4 5 13 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Table 5 3 CRS 316 JP2 Jumper Settings User Interface Jumper JP2 J Setti Control Signal Settings CASES c Pins Jumped LJ X CS amp RS A RTS I Not Connected Note TMI as shipped
87. to either the Traffic or Redundant Modem 3 2 2 Wired around Connection While this redundancy approach is not recommended it can be used after study of the LAN and WAN sides of the IP networks Use the wired around Ethernet connection with the CRS 300 and the CDM 700 modem where both modem data interface slots are needed e g where one slot is HSSI or G 703 and the other slot is GigE With the Ethernet slot configured for the wired around method this gives full redundancy capability to both data slots However care must be taken to ensure there are no Ethernet network loops or connection problems this method should only be used if both modem data slots are used In general the wired around approach can be used in a hub to remotes configuration with standard traffic CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 4 Hub to Hub with Standard Traffic using Routers Figure A 2 shows two hub sites connected with standard Ethernet traffic using routers instead of switches for Ethernet connection The routers will block the broadcasts coming from the remote network Therefore no broadcast storm can be created or the possibility of having a remote MAC on the Hub networks Link 1 Link 2 Transponder Footprint Traffic Modem 1 Tx Rx Network Router a 11 gall o Traffic TraficModemsN _ N CIT uus 7 __ 1 aT Tx Rx pour SOOO
88. traffic Standard traffic is defined as Rx and Tx Ethernet traffic using the same port on the same router or switch whereas split path traffic is Rx and Tx Ethernet traffic using different ports of the same router or switch Each application also has CRS 300 Redundancy applications examples with subsequent sections in this appendix providing examples of applications architecture designed to handle near to far end Ethernet network configurations This includes e Sect A 3 3 Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers e Sect A 3 4 Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Switches e Sect A 3 5 Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches e Sect A 3 6 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic Using Routers Point to Multipoint e Sect A 3 7 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic using Switches Point to Multipoint Ethernet Network Overview When placing modems in a network there are a number of issues that must be addressed first and foremost on the list of concerns is whether implementation of the switches in the network will cause a Networking Loop This is problematic because a Networking Loop will cause a Broadcast Storm which shuts down the network and causes harm to devices in that network THIS WILL NOT PASS TRAFFIC Figure A 1 Networking Loop With Switches CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Figure A 1 illustrates a Networking Loop with switches The problem with this confi
89. ule 3e LI CA WR9189 6 1 ew A E 4 P T T n CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 336 TMI 1 o iE MM NN A gt gt 3 t m m te y t Figure 4 24 Control Cables and HSSI Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 59 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 305 RMI C _ CX CA WR12069 1 CAIWR1206 1X to 4X CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 365 TMI 1 PP CAT5FF7FTGY 7 L1 M p 05 eve A A AMI N ne om Qm 3 Ww Ke z A d E OE 7 o o c 3 ther ain rana om fet feat ven Gantt E Wa M La Figure 4 25 Control Cables and Quad E1 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 60 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 8 CDM 710G 710GL Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations e Interface Combinations e Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e User Data Connections CRS 300 to Users 4 61 CRS 300 1 10 R
90. 0 or CRS 250 Power Supply Module Figure 3 1 for connecting a common chassis ground among equipment The AC power interface provides the safety ground CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 3 2 Chassis Power Interfaces ES TOP CRS 240 AC Power Supply Module BOTTOM CRS 250 DC Power Supply Module Figure 3 4 CRS 300 Chassis Power Supply Interfaces 3 3 2 1 Alternating Current AC Power Interface Delon 1 onforrswish 2 reset Fuse Holder AC Power Specifications Input Power 5W 250 mA maximum Input Voltage 0 264 volts AC 50 60 Hz Connection Type IEC 60320 Type C13 C14 Line and neutral fusing 2X 5mm x 20mm Slow blow type fuses e 1 0A fuses for 115 volt AC operation e 0 5A fuses for 230 volt AC operation Fuse Protection Figure 3 5 Chassis AC Power Interface CRS 240 Power Supply Module CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 3 2 1 1 AC Operation Power Application Figure 3 6 Apply AC Power Apply AC power to the CRS 300 Figure 3 6 typical for each module Do these steps e First plug the provided AC power cord female end into the unit e Then plug the AC power cord male end into the user supplied power source e Finally switch the module ON 3 3 2 1 2 AC Operation Fuse Replacement For AC operation the Switch uses two common 5mm x 20mm S
91. 00 Modem 3 RCA 0 MCA 0300 Modem 9 RCA 0 MCA 0900 RCA 0 MCA 1000 RCA 0 MCA 1100 RCA 0 MCA 0 Modem 10 Redundant Modem 11 CRS 300 SWITCH Serial comm via 15 pin control cables MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 LEGEND MCA Address used by user for M amp C applications for Switch and Traffic modems The Redundant modem is controlled by switch but can be monitored by user RCA Address used for comms between Switch and modems NOTE Effective Feb 2008 EDMAC is not supported in the CDM 700 CDM 710 SLM 5650 or SLM 5650A modems Figure C 3 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 232 with SLM 5650 5650A CDM 7XX Modems 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 LOCAL END Hub Modem 1 RCA 0 MCA 7100 Modem 2 RCA 0 MCA 7200 LUN 3 RCA 0 MCA 7300 Modem 9 RCA 0 MCA 7900 Serial comm via 15 pin control cables Modem 10 RCA 0 MCA 8000 LEGEND MCA Address used by user for M amp C applications for Switch and Traffic modems Redundant RCA 0 Modem 11 MCA 8100 The Redundant modem is controlled by switch but can be monitored by user RCA 0 RCA Address used for comms between Switch and modems CRS 300 MCA 7000 External RS 485 SWITCH Multi drop connection NOTE Effective Feb 2008 EDMAC is not supported in the CDM 700 CDM 710 S
92. 00 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 700 connected to CRS 306 RMI CA RF12279 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED PP CATSFF7FTGY raada AA Ethernet User Data I eerte Unbal G 703 User Data CA RF12278 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED CAIWR12381 1 eru 8 0 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 8 CA WR12361 1 je P In ime AA PUT mu CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 PP CATSFF7FTGY CAIWR12361 1 PP CATSFF7FTGY Tw i CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 1 Figure 4 33 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired thru Example 2 Connections shown for RMI and 1 3 and 8 only 4 81 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 700 connected to CRS 306 RMI Hsst 7 CA WR9189 6 User Dat PP CAT5FF7FTGY iS L gE 7 ae 199 i CA WR12278 1 p m 4 4 AE emote dayne Oman 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 8 CAIWR12278 1 p e m u m CA WR9189 6 Cs 234 o Der CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 CA WR12278 1 DS B E m 1 PE E te E D r mb b D 4 9 Y D Een Gne _ m CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 1 PP CAT5
93. 066 CRS 340 Control Data CA WRO066 NS si ag CAWRO066 CRS 316 or Control CA 0000069 Sect 438 1 Data CA 0000121 CRS 336 Data PPICATSFF7FTGY Sect 4 4 3 8 Wired around Control CA WRO066 Sub Mux Data by User CATS to N A N A Sect 4 4 3 8 2 10 100 1000 Switch 4 4 3 1 Control Cabling Requirement Regardless of Driving Traffic Data Type For RMI connections The Control Data Cable CA WROO66 DB 25F to DB 25M 6 provides the serial communication path between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch via the CRS 310 RMI for all driving traffic data types You must always use this cable For all driving traffic data types see Figure 4 9 through Figure 4 11 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO66 cable between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch CRS 310 RMI e DB 25F connector labeled Data Interface on Redundant CDM 625 A to e DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch CRS 310 RMI For TMI connections Depending on the driving data traffic type in addition to its use as a control cable between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the CRS 310 RMI you may use the 4 21 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA WROO66 cable as a control cable between the Traffic CDM 625 A s and the CRS 330 or CRS 340 TMI as a data cable with the CRS 316 TMI and as a combination control data cable for use with the CRS 340 TMI For specific details re
94. 1 25 CRS 355 UDL idest iiie dece ru bread eei ec esci grade eld eacus eerta etes 1 16 Figure 1 26 CRS 350 ESC Switch Rear 1 16 Figure 1 27 CRS 300 1 1 Redundancy Switch esses seen eene nnne 1 20 Figure 1 28 CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch esses eene nennen nnn nnne nnns nnn nns 1 21 Figure 1 29 CRS 280L L Band IF Switch ccceccccccssececesssececeesseeecsessececeesaeeecsesaeeecsesaeeeeseaaeeeeeesaeesensaas 1 22 Figur 1 30 CRS 350 ESC Switch ici tert etie teque ced eee ree 1 23 Figure 2 1 Unpacking and Inspecting the Shipment sesenta nnn 2 1 Figure 2 2 Typical Rack Mounting Configuration ccccccccccecsssessssecececessesessesecececesseseaaeseeeesesssesnsaeeeeess 2 4 Figure 3 1 Coaxial Connector EXAMples ccccccccccecsssessnsececececessesnsaeeeeecesseseaeseceeecesseseaaeseeeeseeeseseuaeeeeess 3 1 Figure 3 2 D Subminiature Connector Examples esessessesesee eene nnne nnn 3 3 Figure 3 3 CRS 300 Chassis Ground 3 16 Figure 3 4 CRS 300 Chassis Power Supply Interfaces c cccccccssssssssecececesessenseseceeseeseeseaeaeeeesesseesenaeas 3 17 Figure 3 5 Chassis AC Power Interface CRS 240 Power Supply
95. 13 3 2 2 10 Quad E1 Connectors RJ 48F CRS 365 cccceccccsscceesssceeeesssseeeessssecsesseeeeeeessaeceeseeeess 3 14 3 2 2 11 Quad E1 Connectors DB 9F CRS 365D cccccsssccecssseceessssececssssececsseseceesssseceessaaees 3 15 3 3 CRS 300 Chassis Ground and Power Connections ee ecce ee eese ee ee ee eene ee nene nnne 3 16 3 3 2 2 48V Direct Current DC Power Interface 3 19 CHAPTER 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS e eene eene eene enne hens a aree sens rese sar r eese nas 4 1 4 1 OVORVICW ics a a Sud ovas ab VS Ea N s Dua Cere Saws evVEPRR Dre 4 1 4 2 Switch to Switch Connections ssscccsseccsssccssscccssecccssccnssccsssccessccceeccessesessceaseessessoneseees 4 4 4 2 1 CRS 300 to CRS 280 280L Connection 4 4 4 2 2 CRS 300 to CRS 350 CONnnection ccccccssssseececececeensescecececeeuseeseecececesuaesesceeeeeaeeuageseeseeeeeaaags 4 4 4 2 3 300 to CRS 350 and CRS 280 280L Connection 4 4 4 3 IF Cable CONNECUONS 655 sscsccescssescceesddusecesesesetessavessecdscevesssesccsessiccoussdssessesdscasscdvessesnessavsocsves 4 12 4 3 1 IF Cable Connections Single Transponder without 280 2801 4 12 4 3 2 IF Cable Connections Multiple Transponder Us
96. 25 CDM 570A AL CDM 570 570L SLM 5650A SLM 5650 CDM Qx QxL CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CDM 700 CDM 600 L Fully automatic or manual Force Traffic Modem to Redundant Modem Remove selected Traffic Modem from control Programmable holdoff to backup and holdoff to restore from 1 to 99 seconds Switch to Redundant Modem following a Unit fault Tx or Rx traffic faults 9 seconds max Delay interval set to minimum 1 sec e CRS 300 without CRS 280 280L IF Switch IF ON OFF control through the Switch controller e CRS 300 with CRS 280 280L all modems outputs ON all the time e 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Operating e 50 to 100 C 122 to 212 Storage Two independent inputs 100 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz at 25 watts VA max 48 38 to 60 VDC 25 watts max Any one of the 10 traffic paths bridge mode both Rx IF and Tx data e Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD 2 lines 24 characters line e 6 button Keypad ENT Enter CLR Clear 4X navigation LED system status display showing for all modems o Unit fault Rx traffic fault o Tx traffic alarm Online Offline status o Bridge status CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 5 2 Modem vs Terrestrial User Data Interface Specifications Modem f Tm User Data Type User Data Connector s EIA 422 V 35 1 DB 25F Ed EIA 422 V 35 TR Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode 1 RJ45 jj BNG CRS 325 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI 1 DB 15F G 70
97. 3 Unbal DDI IDO 2 BNCs G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI 1 DB 15F CDM 625A CRS 330 G 703 Unbal DDI IDO IDI 4 BNCs 9 HSSI 1 HD 50F CRS 336 Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode 1 RJ45 EIA 422 V 35 LVDS DB 25F CRS 340 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI G 703 Unbal DDI IDO 2 BNCs CRS 365D Quad E1 1 to 4 Ports of E1 2 DB 9F CDM 570L AL CRS 330 G 703 Balanced Unbalanced 1 DB 15F 2 BNC CDM 570 A CRS 340 EIA 422 V 35 EIA 232 1 DB 25F G 703 Balanced Unbalanced 1 DB 15F 2 BNC MIL STD 188 114 EIA 530 1 DB 25F Pam 78 SLM 5650A CRS 325 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI 1 DB 15F SLM 5650 G 703 Unbal DDI IDO 2 BNCs CRS 336 HSSI HD 50F Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode G 703 Bal 00100 DDO IDI CDM Qx QxL GEA G 703 Unbal DDI IDO CRS 336 HSSI 1 HD 50F CRS 365 Quad E1 1 to 4 Ports of E1 4 RJ45s CRS 325 G 703 Unbal 2 BNCs CDM 710G 710GL RON GigE one port only 1 RJ45 CREB 2 BNCS CDM 710 HSSI 1 HD 50F eee GigE one port only 1 RJ45 CRS 325 OC3 Copper 2 BNCs HSSI 1 HD 50F ee GigE one port only 1 RJ45 CRS 345 Multi Port Unbal G 703 1 4 ports 8 BNCs CRS 330 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI 1 DB 15F G 703 Unbal DDI IDO DDO IDI 4 BNCs EIA 422 V 35 EIA 232 LVDS 1 DB 25F CDM 600 L CRS 340 G 703 DDI IDO DDO IDI G 703 DDI IDO CRS 370 HSSI User 1 HD 50F ORS E530 VAS EIS JU
98. 300 Switch 5 5 1 Connect the Switch Power Do these steps to connect the power cords Step Task 1 Make sure that both power supply switches are in the OFF position before you connect the power supply power cords 2 Comtech EF Data supplies each Switch with two power cords Connect the female end of these power cords one to each power supply power input to the power supply connectors 3 Plug both power cords into the power source s n The auto sensing power supplies require no adjustments 4 Once all system connections are in place turn both power supplies ON ON OFF switch for that card Each Switch is shipped with two power supplies It is A CAUTION the IEC line input connector for each power supply card contains the recommended that both be used for maximum reliability If you use only one power supply card you must use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to mask the fault for the unused power supply Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select the nested CONFIG gt OPTIONS gt MASKS gt SW ALARMS menu 2 Select the unused power supply to mask its faults 5 5 2 About the Switch Fuses WARNING For continued operator safety always replace the fuses with the correct type and rating For 115 230 volt AC operation use T1A slow blow 20 mm fuses The power supplies contain two fuses one each for line and neutral connections or L1 L2 where appropriate These are contained within the body of the con
99. 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 0 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 350 to 2801 4 9 IF Cabling Example Single Transponder Configuration ccccccccssssssseceeecessesssteseeeesensees 4 13 IF Cabling Example Multiple Transponder Configuration 4 15 CDM 625 A to CDM 625 A CnC Cable Connection 4 20 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example G 703 driven Configuration 4 29 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example G 703 driven Configuration 4 30 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example Quad E1 driven Configuration 4 31 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example Sub Mux TMIs 3 amp 9 4 32 Cabling Example for CDM 625 A to CRS 350 ccccccsscecssecesscecsseeeeseceeseeceseeecsaeeeesaeceseeeenas 4 35 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM 625 A CDM 600 L Emulation 4 36 Data Cable Connection Example CRS 300 to CDM 570 A or 5701 1 4 39 Control and Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to 1 5650 5650 4 46 Control and Data Cabl
100. 6 2 2 3 2 CONFIG OPTIONS gt HOLDOFFS cccccccccscsssscsssecssecssecssecsaecsaeceeseaesseessereseasseaesenes 6 9 6 2 2 3 3 CONFIG OPTIONS gt ALARM MASK seen 6 10 6 22 2 4 CONEIG IREMOTE ehe Stet tuta s 6 11 6 2 2 4 1 CONFIG REMOTE LOCAL ccccscesscesssssscseesseeesseescseecseecseecaaecauecsaeceaeceaeeeaesseesaes 6 11 6 2 2 4 2 CONFIG REMOTE REMOTE cccccescssscesscesscecseecseecsaecsaecsseceaeceaesesesseessersseesseneesas 6 11 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems ccccccccccssssececssscececssscececsssseeeesseeeceesssseesesseaeees 6 12 6 2 3 SELECT INFO Information t eite o e t edite DR des 6 14 6 2 3 1 INEQ S N s ttm eerte ith 6 14 6 2 3 2 7 INEOSID etm ete dtt 6 14 62 39 JNEQ SETUP ste ene tete oa d eth a URS 6 14 6 2 34 CUNEOSIFESWITGENS eR rh teet ttti 6 14 6 2 3 5 INFO REMCONT Remote Control Info esses eene 6 15 6 2 3 6 INFO MASK Alarm Mask Mfo Junien a a a a 6 15 6 2 4 SELECT MONITOR hte eet tte te hte BSAA oh thks v t aem 6 15 62 11 e rte on nett ene e Cede ied eve 6 15 6 2 4 2 MONITOR SW ALARM eene enne nns nnns nennen nnns 6 16 6 2 4 3 MONITOR STORED EVENTS ssssseseeeeee enne enne snnt sene 6 19 6 2 4 3 1 MONITOR STORED EVENTS gt VIEW nnne nnn nnn nnn n
101. 6 cables between the Switch and each CDM 600 L DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled P3B Data Interface on the CDM 600 Ls If G 703 is the traffic data type also do these steps to connect the CA WR9038 6 data cable which you must use for either Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 Data e DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15F connectors labeled P7 Balanced G 703 on the CDM 600 Ls MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Cables and Connections CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 310 RMI f I Bal G 703 User Data L QJ CN 7 5 1 551 User Data TM m 1 EIA 422 232 LVDS User Data 1 _ c c mc Unbal 6 703 U Te CA WRO066 a o E esp Gare CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 870 TMI 7 re CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 340 TMI 5 am 2651 CDM 600 600L connected to o CRS 330 13 CA WR9038 6 Figure 4 36 Data Cable Connection Example CRS 300 to CDM 600 L Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 and 7 only 4 87 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 11 2 User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the multiplexing equipment or a test data gen
102. 703 T1 E1 Bal Unbal CRS 330 or CRS 340 CRS 310 EIA 422 V 35 EIA 232 CRS 340 CDM 600 L Modems CDM 625 A Modem in CDM 600 Emulator Mode Data Type TMI Type RMI Type G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI Netes 1 2 DDI IDO DDO b Notes 1 2 PRESAN EIA 422 V 35 EIA 232 LVDS CRS 310 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI Notes 1 2 CRS 340 Note 3 G 703 Unbal Notes 1 2 Converts LVDS Modem to from HSSI User CRS 370 Notes 1 For CDM 600 L modem to switch data Bal and Unbal use a DB 15 to DB 15 data cable 2 For CDM 625 A modem to switch data Bal and Unbal use a DB 9 to DB 15 data cable 3 As of September 2008 the CRS 320 TMI is obsolete Use the CRS 340 TMI in its place 4 For CDM 625 A where the terrestrial data type is Ethernet you can use only one of any four Ethernet ports on the CDM 625 A rear panel in Ethernet Bridge Mode 5 From Redundant Modem to RMI use a DB 25 to DB 25 Control cable 6 From Traffic Modem to TMI use a DB 9 to HD 15 Control cable CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Introduction 1 3 3 3 1 1 RMI Card Figure 1 8 CRS 310 RMI PL 9579 1 1 3 3 3 1 2 TMI Cards Figure 1 9 CRS 320 TMI EIA 232 422 PL 9581 1 OBSOLETE REPLACED BY CRS 340 Figure 1 10 CRS 330 TMI G 703 PL 9033 1 Figure 1 11 CRS 340 TMI EIA 232 422 or LVDS or G 703 PL 9387 1 Figure 1 12 CRS 365D TMI E1 1 4 ports PL 12985 2 FOR USE WITH CDM 625 A ONLY MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 2X BNC Male
103. A Address used for comms between Switch and modems set via modem front panels ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range set via Traffic Modem front panels Figure C 5 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 232 with CDM Qx QxL Modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 LOCAL END Hub DISTANT END Remotes RCA 0100 Modem 1 ESA 0111 MCA 7100 MCA 7111 EDMAC master Modem 2 slave ESA 0110 Modem 2 RCA 0200 Modem 1 ESA 0211 MCA 7200 MCA 7211 EDMAC master 0 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 3 RCA 0300 E MCA 7300 Modem 1 ES E MENT Modem 2 EDMAC slave Distant end 1 1 CDM Qx QxL with internal redundancy RS 485 For status of both online and offline Multi drop modems use query FLT cable Modem 9 0900 MCA 7900 Modem 1 ESA 0911 EDMAC master EDMACLINK MCA 7911 ESA 0910 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 10 RCA 1000 MCA 8000 Modem 1 ESA 1011 EDMAC master 8011 1010 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Redundant RCA 1100 Modem 11 MCA 8100 EDMAC as Traffic Modem LEGEND MCA Address used by user for Monitor amp Control applications for Switch and Traffic Modems For the Local Traffic modems use ESA and any back up will be transparent to the M amp C application To address the Redundant Modem directly e g to check it is fault free use MCA RCA Address used for comm
104. A Y Control Cable 12842 6 B 8 Figure B 7 CDM Qx QxL Standard EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable CA WR11417 1 B 9 Figure B 8 CDM Qx QxL EIA 485 Cable Termination 11418 1 B 10 Figure B 9 CDM Qx QxL EIA 485 Null Modem Cable 11419 1 B 11 Figure B 10 CDM Qx QxL Optional EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable CA RB11423 1 B 12 Figure B 11 CDM Qx QxL with CnC Y Control Cable CA WR12069 1 B 13 Figure B 12 CDM 7XX Control Cable CA WR12361 1 sssessseeeeeeeeeenen eene B 14 Figure B 13 EIA 232 422 EIA 530 Control and Data Cable 6 B 18 Figure B 14 IF Cable BNC 500 for CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch 0946 2 B 19 Figure B 15 ASI Balanced G 703 IF Cable BNC 750 0813 8 B 20 Figure B 16 Multi Drop CnC Plus Shielded Data Cable for CDM 625 A 0000275 B 21 Figure B 17 Ethernet Data Cable for CDM 625 A 0000121 B 22 Figure B 18 CDM 625 A Bal G 703 Data Cable CA 0000072
105. A A y 1 to 2 SEN ee Routed to online modem oF 3 to 4 Table 5 7 CRS 336 Jumper JP2 Settings User Interface Jumper JP2 Jumper Settings Control Signal Setting Settings Pins Jumped TA Bto CA B om m CDM 625 A Loop Connected Note TMI as shipped at User HSSI Connector pp TA B amp CA B 1 to 2 MA Routed to online modem r 3 to 4 5 18 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 4 4 HSSI Interface via the CRS 370 TMI Jumper J2 on the CRS 370 TMI selects the functionality of the control signals CA and TA See Figure 5 10 Comtech EF Data ships this TMI pre set with jumper J2 open ISSH Jesh ey d t 0 1 SE ZZt ZEC SH uapow OLE SHO a CRS 370 Front Panel View Jumper J2 Location CRS 370 PCB Top View Figure 5 10 CRS 370 HSSI to LVDS TMI Card Jumper Shown Open Table 5 8 defines the CRS 370 TMI control signal configuration Jumper J2 settings Table 5 8 CRS 370 Jumper J2 Settings User Interface Jumper J2 Control Signal Setting ane id 1 to Loop Note TMI as shipped e RR controls CA e TA controls TX carrier 5 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 5 Configure the CRS
106. ALLATION 2 1 Unpack and Inspect the Shipment Figure 2 1 Unpacking and Inspecting the Shipment The CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch its optional Installation and Operation Manual otherwise available online at http www comtechefdata com and its power cords were packaged and shipped in a reusable cardboard carton containing protective foam spacing CAUTION THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SENSITIVE TO A DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD USE ESD PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING THE EQUIPMENT CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Installation Revision 19 2 2 Q Once opened inspect the shipment Step Task 1 Keep all shipping materials 2 Check the packing list to make sure the shipment is complete 3 Inspect the equipment for damage If damage exists immediately contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data to submit a damage report 4 Read the manual Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure Mount the unit in its assigned position in the rack enclosure Use as required e standard rack mounted shelf if needed e User supplied fasteners to secure the products the rack enclosure threaded front mounting rails Figure 2 2 provides a cut away side view of a typical rack configuration for modems combined with the CRS 300 optional CRS 280 and optional CRS 350 e The CRS 300 is constructed as a 4RU high rack mounting chassis Handles on the Switch front panel facilitate pl
107. BNC connector on the Redundant Modem to the BNC connector on the CRS 280 switch labeled TO REDUNDANT MODEM Ry e Connect the Tx IF BNC connector on the redundant modem to the BNC connector on the CRS 280 switch labeled Tx FROM REDUNDANT From the Tx Traffic Modems e Connect the Rx IF BNC connector on each Traffic Modem to a BNC connector on the CRS 280 switch labeled Rx where Rx designates Rx 1 through Rx 10 TO TRAFFIC MODEM e Connect the Tx IF BNC connector on each Traffic Modem to a BNC connector on the CRS 280 switch labeled Tx where Tx designateis Tx 1 through Tx 10 FROM TRAFFIC MODEM When you use the CDM Qx modem with the CRS 280 IF 70 140 MHz Switch or the CDM QxL modem with the CRS 280L L Band Switch use no more than one Mod Demod per CDM Qx QxL chassis When you use the CRS 280L L Band IF Switch see the CRS 280L 1 N Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CRS280L IOM for additional detailed installation information CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 600 connected to CRS 280 Front Panel RMI p T PL 0946 2 500 OR PL 0813 8 750 PL 0946 2 50Q OR PL 0813 8 75Q CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch Front Panel Txe Tx 10 CRS 280 IF SWITCH 0 75 lt PL 0946 2 500 OR PL 0813 8 750 PL 0946 2 500 O
108. C configuration code 00 NO ERROR 01 Interface 02 LBO Line Build Out 03 FRM Framing mode 04 TFQ Tx Frequency 05 TFT Tx FEC Type 06 TMD Tx Modulation 07 TCR TxFEC Code Rate 08 TDR TxData Rate 09 TSI Tx Spectrum Invert 10 TSC TxScrambler state 11 TPL TxPowerLevel 12 TCK TxClock 13 TDI Tx Data Invert 14 TXO TxCarrier State 15 AUP AUPC enable 16 APP AUPC parameters 17 WUD Warm Up Delay 18 RFQ RxFrequency 19 RFT RxFEC Type 20 RMD Rx Modulation 21 RCR RxFEC Code Rate 22 RDR Rx Data Rate 23 RSI Rx Spectrum Invert 24 RDS RxDescrambler state 25 RDI Rx Data Invert 26 RSW RxSweep Width 27 Eb No Alarm point 28 RBS RxBuffer Size enable 29 ERF External Reference setting 30 EFM EDMAC Framing mode 31 ESA EDMAC Slave Address range 32 TST Testmode 33 Alarm Masks 34 RTS Request To Send control 35 SSI Statistics Sample Interval gt For the CDM Qx QxL modem the code is the decimal number indicating the fault parameter within its MGC configuration code 00 NO ERROR 01 ITF Interface 02 LBO T1 Line Build Out 03 FRM Framing mode 04 TFQ Tx Frequency 05 TFT Tx FEC Type 06 TMD Tx Modulation 07 TCR TxFEC Code Rate 08 TDR TxData Rate 09 TSI Tx Spectrum Invert 10 TSC TxScrambler state 11 TPL Level 12 TxClock 13 TDI Tx Data Invert 14 TXO TxCarrier State 15 AUP AUPC enable 16 APP AUPC parameters 17 WUD Warm Up Delay 18 TXC output state 19 TRS Tx Reed Solomon
109. CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Serial based Remote Product Management Arguments for Command or Response to Que Modem type N A 3 bytes alphanumeric Query Code and qualifier Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Command Code and qualifier Response to query Target to Controller Response to Command Be Target to Controller MOD xxx see Description of Arguments Query only Unit returns information concerning the model of the Redundant Modem attached where xxx is 600 601 indicates 600L 570 indicates 570 A 571 indicates 570L AL indicates Qx modem 70 140MHz Qx1 indicates Qx modem L band 700 indicating the CDM 700 modem 710 indicating the CDM 710 modem 5650 indicating the SLM 5650 modem Number of 2 bytes numerical Query only Unread Stored Switch returns the number of Stored Events which remain Events unread NUE xx see Description of Arguments Note This means unread over the remote control Viewing the stored events from the front panel of the modem does not affect this value Example NUE 98 Command or Query Where x indicates the operating mode 0 manual mode 1 auto mode OPM message OK OPM x OPM received OK but see Description of invalid arguments Arguments OPM message OK but only permitted in Remote mode PRI message OK PRI xx Operating
110. CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Introduction Revision 19 The CRS 300 is intended for hub applications It is compatible for use with the Comtech EF Data modems specified in Table 1 1 While the Switch is capable of controlling any of these modems note that it is important that only one type of modem may be connected to the Switch within a given redundancy system this is because the Redundant Modem must operate identically to the configured Traffic Modem A key feature of the CRS 300 architecture is its ability to allow the Redundant Modem to bridge a Traffic Modem The Switch automatically configures the Redundant Modem to match the bridged modem s configuration The Switch also copies the bridged modem s terrestrial transmit clock data and routes it to the Redundant Modem When used with the CRS 280 280L the CRS 300 additionally routes the bridged modem s Rx IF Because this live traffic is used at all times to verify performance no external test equipment is needed to determine the health of the Redundant Modem Construction features The CRS 300 is modular in construction all replaceable modules install into slots in the back panel This includes the controller Redundant Modem Interface RMI Traffic Modem Interfaces TMIs and Power Supply Units PSUs Because power consumption is below 30 watts for a fully populated Switch the CRS 300 requires no fan cooling Key Reliability Features The CRS 300 i
111. Channel ESC Switch 4 4 5 1 ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems See Figure 4 13 do these steps to connect and secure the Multi purpose Cable CA 0000074 2 places between the rear panels of the CRS 350 and the CDM 625 A s e DB 25F Jxx Overhead D 9M Paxx Audio and DB 15M Pbxx IDR Alarms connectors on the CRS 350 rear panel where xx specifies the number 1 through 10 Traffic Modem and 11 is reserved for the Redundant Modem to e HD 44F IDR Data Alarms Audio and DB 9M ESC connectors on the Redundant and Traffic CDM 625 As 4 4 5 2 ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User You must connect your equipment to the correct corresponding plug in UDI User Data Interface module on the front panel of the CRS 350 This replaces the direct connection to the Traffic CDM 625 A s IDR Audio and Overhead ports 4 4 6 Operation of the CDM 625 A in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode With the exception of EIA 232 type traffic data handling the CDM 600 Emulation Mode enables the CDM 625 A to serve as an operationally transparent replacement unit for CDM 600 L Open Network Satellite Modems MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Cables and Connections 4 4 6 1 Preparing the CDM 625 A for Operation in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode The CDM 625 A may be set for operation in CDM 600 L Emulation mode by selecting this mode of operation from the CDM 625 A front panel From the top level me
112. Code Rate 3D RMD Rx Modulation 3E RSI Rx Spectrum Inversion RDS Rx Descrambler state 40 RSW Rx Sweep Width 42 RCK Rx Clock source 43 EbNo Alarm point 47 RBS Rx Buffer Size 4 RIT Rx Interface Type 4D Rx Ternary Code 4E RFM Rx Framing Mode RIP Rx IF Impedance 50 EFM Unit EDMAC Mode 51 ESA EDMAC Slave Address 55 TST Unit Test Mode 56 MSK Unit Alarm Mask 5C EFR External Freq Ref 5D SSI Statistics Sampling Interval RTE RxTerrestrial Alarm Enable 5F TTA Tx Terrestrial Alarm Mask 60 ODU ODU comms Enable 61 TBA Tx Backward Alarms 65 RBA RxBackward Alarms 69 TVL Tx audio Volume 6D RVL Rx audio Volume 71 DTY Drop Type 72 ITY Insert Type 73 TET TxESC Type 64k or 2 audio 74 RET RxESC Type 64k or 2 audio 75 ITD Invert Tx Data 76 IRD Invert Rx Data SWITCH ALARM MODEM COMMS PROBLEM POSITION 2 There is a fault There is a problem with the I O communications with Traffic Modem 2 The Unit Status front panel LED will be RED Suggestions e Check cable connections see Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS e Check modem configurations see Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION SWITCH ALARM TMI I F MISMATCH POSITION 2 There is a fault There is a mismatch of data interface type between what has been selected in the modem menu and the TMI type that is connected to that Traffic Modem The Unit Status front panel LED will be RED Suggestion Ensure the modem interface type is co
113. DM 570 A CDM 570L AL Balanced 6 703 Data Cable CA WR11999 6 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 16 Modem to User Optional T1 E1 Adapter for CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L DB 15M gt RJ 48F You may use this optional adapter to convert the Type D 15 pin female Balanced G 703 data connector on the User side of the Switch TMI to a standard RJ 48 female port for T1 E1 operation WIRE LEGEND WIRE SIGNAL COLOR NAME BLUE ORANGE 11 3 GREEN Rx z YELLOW GND NC WHITE NC PIN 1 gom RJ 48F TYPE D MALE Figure B 28 Optional T1 E1 Adapter CN 0000268 B 33 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch 4 17 Switch to Modem Quad E1 Data Cable for CDM Qx QxL DB 15F 4X RJ 45M Appendix B You may use this cable to connect the Switch CRS 305 RMI to the redundant CDM Qx QxL Quad E1 interface WIRE LIST TO SIGNAL P1 4 RX1 PI 2 amp 5 CND T RX2 4X RJ 45 1 Ai 1 LT u 15 PIN TYPE D PS FEMALE L amp i3 s g amp Il Lo Figure B 29 CDM Qx QxL Quad 1 Data Cable CA WR13018 1 B 34 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 4 18 Switch to Modem G 703 Data Cable for CDM 700 DB 9F gt 8X BNC 750 Male You may use this cable to co
114. DTR DSR signals using the CRS 316 CRS 320 obsolete or CRS 340 e For HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 336 See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION in this manual for this important configuration information 2 When you use the CDM 625 A in Dedicated Management Port mode the modem disables all four of the offline modem s Ethernet ports unless you configure one of the four ports as the Dedicated Management Port For more information see Sect 5 4 13 3 CONFIG IP Setup in the CDM 625 or CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manuals CEFD P Ns MN CDM625 or MN CDM625A CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 44 2 Carrier in Carrier CnC Data Connections n The CA 0000275 cable bypasses the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch If you use Carrier in Carrier CnC with any Traffic CDM 625 A see Figure 4 8 and do these steps to connect and secure the PMSI Multi drop CnC Plus Cable CA 0000275 11X DB 9M 8 25 between the Redundant CDM 625 A and any CnC enabled Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 9F connector labeled PMSI on the Redundant CDM 625 A to e DB 9F connectors labeled PMSI on all CnC enabled Traffic CDM 625 A s CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 625 Redundant Modem using CnC lt lt E O x cams xc y E vig inj CDM 625 T
115. E o see APPENDIX A 70 G 703 CDI 10 CRS 345 None HSSI CDI 60 CRS 306 Bi CRS 336 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 1 The Redundant CDM 700 must have either the same cards in each slot as any of the Traffic CDM 700s 2 The Traffic CDM 700 must have either the same cards in each slot as any of the other Traffic CDM 700s have or a blank panel installed 3 An OC 3 Optical TMI is not currently available 4 Asof April 2007 e The CRS 336 TMI card replaces the CRS 335 e The CRS 306 RMI card replaces the CRS 305 4 10 3 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems The Control Cable CA WR12361 1 provides the serial communication path between the Switch and the modems and controls the modem s external Tx IF mute control line You must always use this cable See Figure 4 30 and Figure 4 31 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WR12361 1 cables between the Switch and each CDM 700 e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15M connector labeled P1 Alarms on the CDM 700 4 10 4 Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems If G 703 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 33 or Figure 4 35 and do these steps to connect and secure the Traffic Data Cables CA RF12278 1 and CA RF12279 1 between the Switch and each CDM 700 First do these steps to connect and secure the CA RF12279 1 cable
116. F connector labeled Data Interface on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Finally do these steps to connect and secure the Data Cable CA 0000072 DB 15F to DB 9M 6 Use these cables for Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 data between the Switch RMI or TMI s and the Redundant and Traffic CDM 625 A s DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled Balanced G 703 on the Redundant and Traffic CDM 625 A s gt If you use the CRS 325 TMI as shown in Figure 4 10 do these steps Specific cabling requirements apply for operation with the CDM 625 A 4 22 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 First do these steps to connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure the Data Cable CA 0000072 DB 15F to DB 9M 6 between the Redundant CDM 625 A and Switch RMI e DB 9F connector labeled Balanced G 703 on the Redundant CDM 625 A to e DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI Then do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled 1 1 Control on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Finally for Balanced G 703 data only do these steps to connect
117. FF7FTGY Ethernet User Data d aT WE to from 10 100 1000 Switch User provided Figure 4 34 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired around Example 1 Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 and 8 only 4 82 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 700 connected to CRS 306 RMI 1 CA RF12279 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED l Unbal G 703 User Data BLU a CA RF12278 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED CA RF12278 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED CA WR12361 1 Cy CDM 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 8 CA WR12361 1 CDM 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 1 PP CATSFF7FTGY Ethernet User Data Ln i 1 to from 10 100 1000 Switch E l User provided Figure 4 35 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired around Example 2 Connections shown for RMI and 1 3 and 8 only 4 83 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 4 84 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 11 CDM 600 L Modem Connections The CDM 625 and CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modems with available CDM 600 Emulator Mode serve as operationally transparent replacement units for the CDM 600 L Open Network Satellite Modems e Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e User D
118. For detailed instructions on updating your modems to their latest operating firmware see the pertinent modem s Installation and Operation Manual 5 2 3 Configure Your Modem Operation D Make sure to operate your modem with its latest available firmware and hardware configuration Hardware revision upgrades must be performed at Comtech EF Data Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for assistance if the modem does not meet the operational requirements listed in this manual This chapter assumes user familiarity with the menu navigation and configuration parameter selection methods using the pertinent modem front panel menu For detailed instructions on changing configuration settings using the front panel keypad and menus see the Front Panel Operation chapter in your modem s Installation and Operation Manual Use your modem manual to configure each Traffic Modem for the proper Rx and Tx IF power settings modulation code rates and traffic data settings For User to Switch or User to Modem addressing schemes see Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION 5 2 4 Configure Your Modems for 1 N Redundancy 5 2 4 4 Configure Switch to CDM 625 A 1 N Redundancy The Switch communicates to the Redundant and Traffic modems via a serial COMM bus contained within each of the DB 25 or HD 15 control data cables Typical for each modem First use the CDM 625 A Font Panel menu to configure the COMMS make sure to press ENTER to save your change
119. HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch TMI s and the Traffic CDM 625 A s e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled 1 1 Control on the Traffic CDM 625 A s gt When you use the Switch CRS 340 TMI Do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WRO066 for control data purposes between the Switch TMI s and the Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25F connectors labeled Data Interface on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 25 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 4 3 6 HSSI Data Connections If HSSI is the driving traffic data type see Figure 4 9 and Figure 4 10 First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control data purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 between the Switch TMI s and the Traffic CDM 625 A s e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 9F connector labeled 1 1 Control on the Traffic CDM 625 A s Then do these steps to connect and secure the Control Cable CA WR9189 6 HD 50M gt HD 50M 6 for data purposes between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e 50 pin Type HD HSSI SCSI II female connector labeled HSSI on the Switch TMI s to e 50 pin Ty
120. IA 485 Transmit Data B Out 3 EIA 232 Receive Data In T EIA 485 Receive Data A see note In 2 EIA 232 Transmit Data Out 6 EIA 485 Receive Data B see note In 1 Ground 3 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 1 3 Remote Control Connector DB 9M The DB 9M Remote Control connector on the CRS 230 provides 2 Wire EIA 232 and EIA 485 serial remote monitor and control access to the Switch Remote Control Table 3 2 Remote Control Connector Pin Signal Function Direction 1 Ground 6 EIA 485 Receive Data B see note In 2 EIA 232 Transmit Data Out 7 EIA 485 Receive Data A see note In 3 EIA 232 Receive Data In 8 EIA 485 Transmit Data B Out 4 Reserved do not connect to this pin 9 EIA 485 Transmit Data A Out 5 Ground 3 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 1 4 System Alarms Connector DB 25F See Table 3 3 for the pinouts for the DB 25F System Alarms Bu 2 System Alarms mps connector the CRS 230 v Table 3 3 System Alarms Connector Show Fault when Switch loses power Default Show No Fault when Switch loses power 13 Modem Summary DFM Fault Normally Closed 12 10 Switch Unit Fault Normally Open Switch Unit Fault Normally Closed Form C Fault Relay Common Common for pins 9 13 and 21 24 Audio
121. Interface connectors Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the SLM 5650 5650A modems ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems See Figure 4 19 and do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WRO066 between the rear panel of the CRS 350 and each SLM 5650 5650A 4 44 MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Cables and Connections e DB 25F Jxx Overhead connector on the CRS 350 rear panel where xx specifies the numbers 1 through 10 Traffic SLM 5650 5650As and R11 is reserved for the Redundant SLM 5650 5650A to e DB 25M P1 Overhead Data connector on each SLM 5650 5650A 4 6 6 User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User You must connect your equipment to the correct corresponding plug in User Data Interface UDI card on the front panel of the CRS 350 This replaces the direct connection to the Traffic SLM 5650 5650A s Overhead port CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 SLM 5650 5650A with optional GigE Interface card Connected to 66895307 RMI amp nomd Osta J6 ELAS _ c ey coment EF Dats Corp L F CA WR0066 ic ery HSSI Ethernet User Data 1 User Dat
122. It produces an adjustable blue light Compared to a Liquid Crystal Display LCD it has greatly superior viewing characteristics and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast On most menu displays a flashing solid block cursor blinks at a once per second rate This indicates the currently selected item digit or field CONFIG MANUAL OPTIONS REMOTE ACTIVE Where this solid block cursor would obscure the item being edited for example a numeric field the cursor automatically changes to an underline cursor ACTIVE MODEMS ENTER 123 56 8 10 If you were to display the same screen for weeks at a time the display could become burnt with this image To prevent this the unit has a screen saver feature that activates after 1 hour The top line of the display shows a customizable Switch ID The bottom line shows the current status of the Switch followed by Press any key Press any key The message moves from right to left across the display and then wraps around Pressing any key restores the previous display 6 1 3 1 Opening Screen COMTECH CRS 300 SWITCH for CDM XXX modem vX XX A welcome screen similar to what is pictured here displays whenever power is first applied to the unit It identifies the modem and its current running firmware version Press any key to access the top level SELECT menu 6 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Front Panel Operation 6 1 3 2 Menu Structure MN C
123. LECT Top Level Menu SELECT CONFIG INFO MONITOR STORE LD UTIL Use the lt gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT The function of each menu branch and the chapter section that provides information on that branch and its accompanying submenus is as follows Selection Sect Menu Branch Description CONFIG 6 2 2 Configuration Permits you to fully configure the Switch INFO 62 3 Information Permits you to view information on the Switch without having to go into configuration screens Permits you to monitor the status of the Switch and view the log of stored events for MONTOR b24 both the Switch and its attached modems STORE LD 6 2 5 Store Load Permits you to store and to retrieve up to 10 different Switch configurations Utility Permits you to perform miscellaneous functions such as setting the Real time UTIL 6 2 6 aah clock adjusting the display brightness etc 6 2 2 SELECT CONFIG Configuration CONFIG MANUAL AUTO OFF OPTIONS REMOTE ACTIVE Use the lt gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT The submenus available under the CONFIG menu branch are as follows Selection Sect Menu Branch Description MANUAL 6 2 2 1 Permits you to select which traffic MODEM the Switch should bridge or backup AUTO 6 2 2 2 Permits you to turn AUTO mode off or on The currently selected state is always OFF ON m shown on this menu Permits you to set several operati
124. LM 5650 or SLM 5650A modems Figure C 4 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 485 with SLM 5650 5650A CDM 7XX Modems C 6 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix C RS 485 Multi drop LOCAL END Hub RCA 0100 MCA 0100 EDMAC master ESA 0110 RCA 0200 MCA 0200 EDMAC master ESA 0210 RCA 0300 MCA 0300 EDMAC master ESA 0310 Modem 2 Note 1 1 internal redundancy in EDMAC Slave mode is available only in firmware version 1 6 2 or later MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 DISTANT END Remotes Modem 1 ESA MCA 01 11 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 1 ESA MCA 0211 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 1 ESA MCA 0311 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Distant end 1 1 CDM Qx QxL with internal redundancy For status of both online and offline modems use FLT cable Modem 9 RCA 0900 0900 EDMAC master ESA 0910 RCA 1000 MCA 1000 EDMAC master ESA 1010 Redundant RCA 1100 Modem 11 MCA 1100 EDMAC as Traffic Modem Modem 10 CRS 300 SWITCH External RS 232 Serial connection Modem 1 ESA MCA 0911 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 1 ESA MCA 1011 Modem 2 EDMAC slave LEGEND MCA Address used by user for Monitor amp Control applications for Switch and Traffic Modems Forthe Local Traffic modems use ESA and any back up will be transparent to the M amp C application To address the Redundant Modem directly e g to check it is fault free use MC
125. M 5650A Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information about using the modem front panel menus 5 5 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 2 4 3 2 Configure Ethernet Bridge Mode via Optional Network Processor NP Interface Due to backplane limitations the Switch supports Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode only Ethernet Bridge Mode redundancy when using SLM 5650 5650A modems equipped with the optional Network Processor NP Interface is provided by a single IP Address scheme Typical for each Online Modem use the SLM 5650 5650A Front Panel menu to verify Single IP Address Mode make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task Use the lt gt arrow keys to select the nested Select CONFIG gt Remote gt EthernetConfig gt Option Card Addr gt Network Proc menu 2 Verify that the AddrMode is set to Single 1 Then for the Offline Modem use the SLM 5650 5650A Front Panel menu to verify Single IP Address Mode make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task Use the lt gt arrow keys to select the nested Select CONFIG gt Remote gt EthernetConfig gt Option Card Addr gt Network Proc menu 2 Set the Traffic IP Address of the Online Modem only 3 Verify that the Traffic IP Address also appears on the Offline Modem 1 In Ethernet Bridge Mode the Switch keeps the Online Modem s act
126. M 700 User is shown Figure A 9 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch will learn the new MAC address of the redundant unit and traffic will be passed again This type of architecture will slow down the switching time because the Switch will need to re learn the correct port connection CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Traffic Modem 1 2 1 1 ejt mimm 10 Router Network or Switch hd Traffic Modem N 55 nuu Redundant Modem offline 1 16 2 ommmm m is Network Router L or Switch Traffic Modem TuRX aoe mE a 4 E Network Router or Switch Traffic Modem TxIRX sistas ns K Figure A 8 Wired thru for Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches Traffic Modem 1 Qu 1 15 MEA Traffic Modem N CT o4 omm quim Redundant Modem offline CX ommum 5s N Router or Switch Traffic Modem 15 zu SO XIX a Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem 9 uu TX RX Figure A 9 Wired around for Hub to Remotes With Standard Traffic Using Routers or Switches CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 7 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic using Routers Point to Multipoint Figure A 10 shows hub to remotes configuration with standard and split path Ethernet
127. MCS In the SatMac application go to the Link Edit Mode screen to enter the Monitor amp Control Addresses MCA CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 Notes EF DATA 2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA 480 333 2200 PHONE 480 333 2161 FAX
128. MN CRS300 I1OM Preface Revision 19 The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial number or the serial number of any of its parts has been altered defaced or removed The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the product The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss or damage from any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime environments The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on site or any labor required to diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or products or for any inability to use them either separate from or in combination with any other equipment or products A fixed charge established for each product will be imposed for all equipment returned for warranty repair where Comtech EF Data Corporation cannot identify the cause of the reported failure Exclusive Remedies Comtech EF Data Corporation s warranty as stated is in lieu of all other warranties expressed implied or statutory including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser lessee or other user of Co
129. Male HD 15 Female Figure 1 20 CRS 315 TMI PL 11493 1 OBSOLETE Figure 1 21 CRS 336 TMI HSSI or GigE PL 12499 1 ALSO USED WITH CDM 625 A 2X HD 50 Female 2X RJ 45 HD 15 Female 1 14 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 8X BNC Male HD 15 Female Figure 1 22 CRS 345 TMI G 703 User I F a Slot 2 Modem I F oes 22 3 pa en 6 703 4 ports E mm PL 11495 1 i SS D FOR USE WITH E P CDM 700 ONLY Pe DB 9 Makle Quad E1 Port I 2 3 4 p Traffic Modem Intfc TMI Figure 1 23 CRS 365 TMI CRS 365 E1 1 4 ports PL 12985 1 FOR USE WITH CDM Qx QxL ONLY x Poit 1 Sez 3 4 4X RJ 45 HD 15 Female 1 4 Optional CRS 350 ESC Switch cmm P za KJ l ju es f dica Hig f js ii 95 652 e Figure 1 24 CRS 350 ESC Switch Front Panel The CRS 350 Engineering Service Channel ESC Switch is intended for use with the CDM 600 L CDM 625 A and SLM 5650 5650A modems The CRS 350 is constructed as a 3RU high rack mounting chassis designed for mounting to the back of a 19 inch rack See Figure 2 2 in Chapter 2 INSTALLATION for an installation example Figure 1 24 shows the user interface side of the CRS 350 ESC Switch Here you have access to the Audio Overhead and IRD connector interfaces featured on the CRS 355 User Dat
130. Memp at the prompt to change to the temporary directory created earlier using Command line e dir to list the files extracted to the temporary directory from the downloaded archive file The firmware files have been successfully downloaded to the User PC and are now available for FTP upload to the Switch via the CCCFLASH Utility Application 5 24 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 6 1 2 3 Execute the CCCFLASH Upload Utility Application Make sure a User PC serial port is connected to the CRS 300 Remote Control connector located on the CRS 230 System Controller Card with a user provided EIA 232 serial cable Cabling details are shown in the CCCFLASH Uploader dialogue box and provided in Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS Data Product Support if you have additional questions or need assistance n Full on line help is provided with the CCCFlash Upload Utility Application Contact Comtech EF Run the CCCFLASH Upload Utility Application e Double click on CCCFLSHC EXE filename or desktop icon to open the application e Follow the prompts presented in the application dialog boxes e g select the serial port upload baudrate firmware image file etc and then execute the upload process Following the successful upload process the Switch will automatically restart running the new version of firmware During this process the non volatile RAM
131. Mode must be disabled on the Hub Tx Rx modem because if a computer on the remote sends a broadcast out to the Hub the modem learns that MAC is local when in fact it is not Hub to Remotes Remote Carriers Transponder Hub A and B Footprint A Hub Hub Note Traffic Modem 1 Learning Mode must be disabled Traffic Modem 1 Network fl gt te ENS UU Switch 46 REN a Li i z EE Traffic Modem N A ma ES CONE mm 5 ma 1 With VLAN and Static ARP entries for the Tx modem b Network Router or Switch Traffic Modem gt 5 9 TX RX 4 gt s mimm Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem T TXIRx gt 0 i ages 505 Figure A 13 Point to Multipoint Using Switches A wired thru Ethernet redundancy example is shown in Figure A 14 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the Switch does not change because the Ethernet connection is properly rerouted within the CRS 300 from the Traffic Modem to the Redundant Modem A wired around Ethernet redundancy example is shown for the CDM 700 User in Figure A 15 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch will learn the new MAC address of the redundant unit and traffic will be passed again This type of architecture will slow down the switching time because the Switch
132. N MN CRS280L IOM Conventions and References Patents and Trademarks See all of Comtech EF Data s Patents and Patents Pending at http patents comtechefdata com Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the trademark owners Warnings Cautions and Notes A WARNING INFORMS YOU ABOUT A POSSIBLE HAZARD THAT MAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY A CAUTION informs you about a possible hazard that MAY CAUSE INJURY or PROPERTY DAMAGE n A NOTE gives you important information about a task or the equipment Q A REFERENCE directs you to additional information about a task or the equipment Examples of Multi Hazard Notices A DANGER AA A DANGER Electrocution hazard Lockout tagout before cleaning or servicing X Ray radiation inside Do NOT bypass interlocks Refer to manuals for additional safety information xviii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Preface Revision 19 Recommended Standard Designations The Electronic Industries Association EIA designations supersede the Recommended Standard RS designations References to the old designations may be shown when depicting actual text e g RS 232 displayed on Web Server pages serial remote interfaces Telnet Command Line Interfaces CLIs or unit rear panels All other references in the manual refer to EIA designations CAUTION You should carefully review the following information Safety and Compliance
133. PL 0813 8 CDM 625 connected to CRS 325 TMI 9 m 10 CDM 625 connected to CRS 316 TMI 7 T d 1 1 r Ethernet User Data to from 10 100 1000 Switch I l User provided Figure 4 12 CRS 300 to CDM 625 A Cable Connection Example Sub Mux TMIs 3 amp 9 Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 7 and 9 only 4 32 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 444 Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the external router multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic CDM 625 A s Data Interface connectors For Quad E1 operation the optional CA 0000163 and CA 0000164 Adapter Cables may be purchased from Comtech EF Data to adapt the Balanced G 703 or Auxiliary G 703 9 pin Type D female connectors to either a standard 15 pin Type D or a RJ 48 female connection pair See Figure B 30 or Figure B 31 in Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS O 1 Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface 2 Ensure that you correctly configure the modem operation for Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 data traffic 4 4 5 Data Connections CRS 350 Engineering Service
134. R PL 0813 8 750 Overhead Tf MADE Jig IOI Jj gt S A COMT CH EFOATA m m 9 d CDM 600 connected to CRS 280 Front Panel TMI 1 Figure 4 7 IF Cabling Example Multiple Transponder Configuration CRS 280 and CDM 600s shown connections for RMI and TMI 1 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 4 CDM 625 A Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations e Carrier in Carrier CnC Data Connections e Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Data Connections CRS 300 to User e Data Connections CRS 350 Engineering Service Channel ESC Switch e ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems o ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User Using the CDM 625 A Modem in CDM 600 Emulator Mode e Preparing the CDM 625 A for Operation in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode o Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 4 4 4 1 CDM 625 A Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling and power up sequenc
135. R DSR signals See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information See Figure 4 15 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO66 cables between the Switch and each CDM 570 A or CDM 570L AL DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 25F connectors labeled Data Interface on the CDM 570 A or CD 570L ALs If G 703 is the traffic data type also do these steps to connect and secure the Data Cable CA WR11999 6 which you must use for either Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 Data DB 15M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15F connectors labeled Balanced E1 T1 on the CDM 570 A or CDM 570L ALs User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors labeled User Data Interface on the Switch TMI s This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data Interface connectors n 1 Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface 2 Ensure that you correctly configure modem operation for Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 data CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 For T1 E1 operation the optional CN 0000268 T1 E1 Adapter see Figure B 32 in Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS may be purchased from Comt
136. RS 315 2 Use CRS 336 instead of CRS 335 To maintain older TMls in the field Switch firmware must also support the CRS 335 3 Use CRS 306 instead of CRS 305 To maintain older RMIs in the field Switch firmware must also support the CRS 335 4 Formodems where the terrestrial data type is Ethernet you can use only one Ethernet port in Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode on the modem rear panel when using the optional Ethernet interface 1 3 3 3 2 1 RMI Cards DB 25 Male 2X BNC Male 15 Male Figure 1 14 CRS 305 RMI S 9 PL 11494 1 14 530 e D HD 50 Female HD 15 Female 10 100 1000 2X BNC Male DB 15 Male Figure 1 15 CRS 306 RMI PL 11494 2 HD 50 Female HD 15 Female DB 25 Male DB 15 Male CRS 307 Figure 1 16 CRS 307 RMI PL 11494 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 3 3 3 2 2 TMI Cards DB 25 Female Se ORS 315 J2 REL TMI Figure 1 17 CRS 315 TMI ass PL 11493 1 Se ee 22 8 P1 Modem Interface J1 __ OBSOLETE D YTITTITVITT M s il DB 25 Male DB 25 Female RJ 45 Figure 1 18 CRS 316 TMI He c RS422 or GigE PL 12498 1 ALSO USED WITH CDM 625 A l i co C EIA 23 Ethernet Bare px DB 25 Male RJ 45 HD 15 Female 2X BNC Male DB 15 Female CRS 325 Figure 1 19 CRS 325 TMI G 703 or ASI PL 11492 1 ALSO USED WITH y Pt as 625 3 2X BNC Male DB 15
137. RS300 IOM Revision 19 Figure 6 2 shows the menu structure of the CRS 300 The menu branches and applicable submenus are described in detail in the chapter sections that follow Note also that chapter sections may refer to the old Recommended Standard RS designation rather than the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association EIA SELECT CONFIG CONFIG INFO MANUAL MONITOR OPTIONS STORE LD REMOTE UTIL ACTIVE INFO SIN ID SETUP IF SWITCH REMCONT MASK MONITOR STATUS SW ALARM STORED EVENTS COMMS 10 L STORE LOAD CONFIG STORE LOAD UTILITY SET RTC DISPLAY SW ID TEST RELAY MANUAL SELECT BRIDGE BACKUP OPERATING MODE AUTO OFF AUTO ON OPTIONS PRIORITY HOLDOFFS ALARM MASK SELECT REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL REMOTE STORED EVENTS VIEW CLEAR ALL POWER OFF RELAY LOGIC DEFAULT INVERT PRIORITY NONE UP DOWN ENT HOLDOFFS BACKUP SEC RESTORE SEC ALARM MASK MODEM ALARMS MODEM ALARM SW ALARMS MASK AUDIO NONE TX RX REMOTE TX RX CONTROL BAUDRATE INTERFACE SWITCH ALARM MASK NONE KPSU A PSU BN AUDIO MASK NONE SW ALARMS MODEM ALMS BOTH ELECT INTERFACE RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W Figure 6 2 CRS 300 Menu Tree 6 6 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 Front Panel Operation 6 2 1 SE
138. S CTS DTR DSR CRS 320 obsolete or CRS 340 TMIs and CA TA CRS 370 TMI See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH DB 25 Male 1 3 3 3 2 SLM 5650 5650A CDM Qx QxL CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CDM 700 Interface Cards The following tables indicate the TMI Traffic Modem Interface and RMI Redundant Interface cards that should be used with each modem and data type SLM 5650 5650A Modems Data Type TMI Type RMI Type Note 3 MIL STD 188 1 14 EIA 530 422 or Single port CRS 316 Note 1 CRS 306 GigE only Ethernet Bridge Mode CRS 307 G 703 Bal UnBal CRS 325 CRS 306 HSSI or Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode CRS 336 Notes 2 4 CRS 306 307 CDM Qx QxL Modems Data Type TMI Type RMI Type EIA 530 422 V 35 EIA 232 CRS 316 Note 1 G 703 T1 E1 Bal D amp I CRS 325 HSSI CRS 336 Note2 Quad 1 CRS 365 CDM 710G 710GL Modems Data Type TMI Type RMI Type G 703 vnb CRS 325 CRS 306 HSSI or GigE CRS 336 Note 4 CDM 710 Modem Data Type TMI Type RMI Type ASI CRS 325 HSSI or GigE CRS 336 Note 4 pore CDM 700 Modem Data Type TMI Type RMI Type Note 3 OC3 Copper CRS 325 HSSI or GigE CRS 336 Notes 2 4 CRS 306 G 703 E3 T3 STS 1 UnBal 1 to 4 Ports CRS 345 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 Notes as of April 2007 1 Use CRS 316 instead of CRS 315 To maintain older TMs in the field Switch firmware must also support the C
139. Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Notes A 14 Appendix CABLE DRAWINGS B 1 Overview This appendix contains technical specification drawings for the cables used with the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch These cables are divided into three categories User Utility Cables Sect B 2 Control Cables Sect B 3 and Control IF Data Cables Sect B 4 n The European EMC Directive EN55022 EN50082 1 requires that you use properly shielded cables for DATA I O These cables must be double shielded from end to end ensuring a continuous ground shield The tables in Sections B 3 and B 4 cross reference the modem specific cabling figures featured in Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS B 2 User Utility Cables App B FIG CEFDP N DESCRIPTION USED FOR TRAFFIC TYPE USED WITH CRS 300 gt B 1 NIA DB 25M gt DB 37F EIA 530 gt EIA 422 449 DCE Conversion User data B 2 DB 25M gt 34 pin Winchester Female EIA 530 gt V 35 DCE Conversion User data B 3 N A DB 9M gt DB 9F CRS 300 Remote gt PC Serial Port User EIA 232 M amp C Firmware Update B 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 B 2 1 Switch to User EIA 530 to EIA 422 449 Data Conversion Cable DB 25M gt DB 37F This cable provides the EIA 530 to EIA 422 449 DCE conversion for connections between the Switch an
140. TED PAIR P1 38 P4 18 ME 72 00 3 00 1 8 4 21 FEMALE P1 23 P4 25 P2 2 P48 P48 P244 4 10 2 7 4 5 4 13 2 5 P4 22 Figure B 25 CDM 625 A to CRS 350 Multi purpose Cable CA 0000074 B 30 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 4 14 Switch to User Switch to Modem Balanced G 703 Data Cable DB 15M DB 15F You may use this Type D 15 pin cable for Balanced G 703 data connections between the Switch and User data or between the Switch and SLM 5650 5650A CDM Qx QxL and CDM 600 L Modems PAIR UP TWISTED PAIRS AS SHOWN WIRE REMAINING TWISTED PAIRS STRAIGHT THRU OE LINK TOGETHER IN SHELL 15 PIN TYPE D MALE FEMALE MES 72 00 3 00 Figure 26 Balanced G 703 Data Cable CA WR9038 6 B 31 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 15 Switch to Modem Switch to User Balanced G 703 Data Cable for CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL DB 15M DB 15F You may use this Type D 15 pin cable for Balanced G 703 data connections between the Switch and CDM 570 A or CDM 570L AL Modems or between the Switch and the user data REMAINING TWISTED PAIRS STRAIGHT THRU PAIR UP TWISTED PAIRS AS SHOWN INDICATORS T HER L OVERALL SHIELD AE M EUST 15 PIN TYPE D 15 PIN TYPE D MALE FEMALE um 72 00 Figure B 27 C
141. TH AS REQ D FEMALE 7 TWISTED PAIRS PLUS OVERALL FOIL BRAID SCREEN BELDEN 8107 OR8307 OR EQUIVALENT NOTES USE METAL BACKSHELLS FOR D TYPE CONNECTORS ENSURE SHIELDING FOIL AND OR BRAID IS BONDED TO METAL BACKSHELL FOR EMC SHIELDING Figure B 2 DCE Conversion Cable EIA 530 to V 35 B 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 2 3 Switch to User Monitor and Control M amp C Cable DB 9F gt DB 9F You may use this cable for a simple EIA 232 connection between the Switch Remote Control connector and a PC serial port You will need this cable for Switch M amp C purposes and to perform your modem s firmware update procedure 9 PIN TYPE D 9 PIN TYPE D FEMALE FEMALE p eMe ie RS Lox vive TID ToC ET A os ESAE Kee EATEN LER ATR d Figure B 3 Switch and Modem M amp C Cable B 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 B 3 Control Cables App FIG CEFD P N DESCRIPTION USED FOR TRAFFIC TYPE USED WITH CRS 300 gt REF Ch 4 FIG B 4 CA 0000069 HD 15M gt DB 9M 6 Control CDM 625 A 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 5 CA WR12136 1 HD 15M HD 15M 4 Control SLM 5650 5650A 4 16 4 17 4 18 B 6 CA WR12842 6 HD 15M gt DB 9M HD 15M 6 Y Control TMI RMI SLM 5650 5650A SLM 5650 5650A AGC I amp Q gt User 7
142. U m CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 330 TMI 3 U f rn Tu mm e Aer cot Figure 4 14 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM 625 A CDM 600 L Emulation Mode Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 5 and 7 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 5 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Modem Connections e Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e User Data Connections CRS 300 to User CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing Traffic Modem The cabling power up sequence must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This sequence is described in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems Traffic modems with differing data types can all be supported by the Redundant Modem Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems The 25 pin Control Data Cable CA WROO66 provides the EIA 422 232 traffic data path and serial communication path between the Switch and the modems Therefore you must alwys use this cable even when the data type is G 703 n The Switch TMIs CRS 320 obsolete and CRS 340 feature jumpers that are pre set to ensure proper operation with traffic data for EIA 422 with RTS CTS DT
143. Use the lt gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT 6 2 2 3 1 CONFIG OPTIONS gt PRIORITY PRIORITY POSITION 2 UP DOWN and then ENTER If one link is considered more important than all others this feature enables you to prioritize that link For example if the Switch is in AUTO mode and it is already backing up a link that is not a priority link If the priority link now fails the link will be restored regardless of its fault state The priority link will now be bridged and then backed up Q Only activated TMI slots will be available for selection as the V arrow keys are pressed 6 2 2 3 2 CONFIG OPTIONS gt HOLDOFFS BACKUP HOLDOFF SEC 05 RESTORE HOLDOFF SEC 10 Use the 4 gt arrow keys to switch between the BACKUP and HOLDOFF settings Then use the A Y arrow keys to adjust the time in seconds Both HOLDOFFs can be set from 1 to 99 seconds Edit the BACKUP and RESTORE HOLDOFF times and then press ENT You may set the HOLDOFFs delay times between the Switch s modem alarm detection and its reaction to the event These HOLDOFFs apply only when the Switch is in AUTO mode When an active modem exhibits an unmasked fault the Switch bridges it with the Redundant Modem and checks that the latter is not also faulted If there is no fault the BACKUP HOLDOFF determines how long the Switch will wait before performing the actual backup or switchover of traffic to the Redundant Modem
144. X X 7 14 Unknown command CLD X 7 10 SDT X X 7 14 CST X X 7 10 SGC X X 7 14 Message OK but not permitted in Current mode DAY X X 7 10 SID X X 7 4 EID X 7 10 SNO X 7 15 Message OK but only permitted in Remote mode FLT X 7 11 SWR 7 15 LRS X X 7 11 TIM X 7 15 Timed out a pass through message MAM 7 11 XMI X 7 16 MOD X 7 12 7 8 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Serial based Remote Product Management Command Code and qualifier Parameter Type Audio Alarm Mask Active Modems Active Modem Query Bridged or Backed up Modem Number Backup Holdoff Time Clear All Stored Events Arguments for Command or Response to Que 1 byte numerical 10 bytes numerical 10 bytes numerical 3 bytes numerical 2 bytes numerical Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Command or Query Where x indicates the Audio alarm mask 0 no faults masked audio enabled in response to any fault 1 Switch faults masked 2 Modem faults masked 3 All faults masked audio never enabled Command or Query Where x is the active state of all 10 Traffic Modems 0 de activate Traffic Modem except if in back up 1 activate Traffic Modem Redundant modem is always active Query only Where x indicates the state of all 10 Traffic Modems 0 TMI not presen
145. a 1 p m p mm m T cns 25e 5 DC Power Supply Module LJ CA WR12136 1 CA WR9189 6 41 En P1 Overhead Data dr amp A ke wne 6 DASI 201 5 08 a oo ME NND je AE gt UF Ow Corp 26 Eihera 40 Alterna JI Autihary 410 Remote SLM 5650 5650A connected to CRS 336 TMI 8 PP CATSFF7FTGY Bi Er P Overneed Data Je i nusa lt E i res f Date Com Emene J8 J9 Auxsary SLM 5650 5650A with optional GigE Interface card connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 CA WR12136 1 ef CA WRO0066 i Ex SLM 5650 5650A connected to CRS 316 TMI 1 Figure 4 16 Control and Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to SLM 5650 5650A Connections shown for RMI amp TMls 1 3 and 8 only Pi Overhead Data JO J18 Remote 4 46 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 SLM 5650 5650A with optional G 703 Interface card veia to CRS 306 RMI A _ d Ex Pt Ove errosa onm 0 Be DATA 2 fe Ae gt ee D 9 1 red T a 4 L EL gpk 2 EF DewCop 35 Emernet tary 210 Remole CA WR9038 1 2X PL 0813 8 CA WR12136 1 a T wobec Eat Unbai G 703 E 9 e Qe DC Pow OC Power Suppty 7 m Y
146. a Cable for CDM 625 A DB 9M gt DB 9F You may use this Type D 9 pin cable for the Quad E1 data connections between the Switch CRS 365D TMI and the CDM 625 A Modem nn E 10 3 00 P1 J1 o 1 1 9 PIN WIRE LIST 9 PIN TYPE D FRom TO TYPE MALE n SIGNAL FEMALE 1 1 Port 4 Rx 3 3 Gnd drain wire 4 Port 3 Rx 9 Port 3 Tx 5 Port 3 Tx Figure B 22 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Cable CA 0000136 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 4 11 Modem to User Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable for CDM 625 A DB 9M 2X DB 15F You may use this cable to adapt the Type D 9 pin female Balanced G 703 or Auxiliary G 703 data connectors to a standard Type D 15 pin connector pair for Quad E1 operation P1 zx o 9 PIN TYPE D 2X 15 PIN MALE TYPE D FEMALE yi LABELED j VIT Port 1 or 3 P1 BERTI OSE 1 22 LABELED Port 2 or 4 Ln s e PS rn Port Port 1 or 3 Tx In or 3 Tx In Ee BET hug Figure B 23 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable CA 0000163 B 28 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 12 Modem to User Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable for CDM 625 A DB 9M 2X RJ 48F You may use this cable to adapt the Type D 9 pin female Balanced G 703 or Auxiliary G 703 data connectors to a standard RJ 48 c
147. a Interface UDI Figure 1 25 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 Figure 1 25 shows the user interface for one of the 10 CRS 355 UDIs that plug in at the front panel of the CRS 350 ESC Switch As explained in detail in the pertinent modem sections of Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS your equipment should be connected directly to the ports on this UDI instead of connecting directly to the Traffic Modem s Audio Overhead and IDR Alarms ports DB 15 Female User Data Intfc UDI CRS 355 S Open Network Overhead Figure 1 25 CRS 355 UDI ye m EAM DB 25 Male DB 9 Female The rear of the CRS 350 shown in Figure 1 26 contains these same three connectors that correlate with their respective connectors on each of the modems Pi2 To IF Switch J12 CRS Switch Control Figure 1 26 CRS 350 ESC Switch Rear Panel CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Introduction MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 1 5 Summary of Specifications 1 5 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Specifications Characteristic Switch Type Compatible Modems Operating Modes Switching Conditions Switching Time IF Switching Temperature Humidity CE Mark AC Prime Power DC Prime Power Redundant Modem Signal Source Front Panel Audible Alarm Common faults Dimensional Envelope Weight 1 N Redundancy Switch system N 10 max Bridging architecture C161 control processor CDM 625A CDM 6
148. able DB 15M DB 15F B 31 B 4 15 Switch to Modem Switch to User Balanced G 703 Data Cable for CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL DB 15M DB 15F B 32 B 4 16 Modem to User Optional T1 E1 Adapter for CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L ROREM PCT B 33 B 4 17 Switch to Modem Quad E1 Data Cable for CDM Qx QxL DB 15F 4X RJ 45M B 34 B 4 18 Switch to Modem G 703 Data Cable for CDM 700 DB 9F 8X BNC 750 Male B 35 5 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 B 4 19 Switch to Modem G 703 Data Cable for CDM 700 DB 15F8X BNC 750 B 36 B 4 20 Switch to Modem Audio Data Cable for CDM 600 L DB 9M DB 9F B 37 APPENDIX C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION C 1 C 1 Addressing Ae M C 1 Switch Addresses oe tt dete ett e E veut ea e du C 2 C 1 2 Modem and Transceiver Addresses 2 2 Modem essa nhat C 11 C 3 5 2 A AT 12 C 4 M amp C Applications E 13 TABLES Table 1 1 CRS 300 Compatib
149. ables and Connections Revision 19 IF Cables User Provided A BISA Redundant Modem RM 3 gt vi Dacor J Einer mnt SLM 5650A Traffic Modem 2 pt EHE T a e neu Core JD ineme SLM 5650A Traffic Modem TM 3 E ot a ere EL til 1 Splitters Combiners User Provided To User From User Upconverter Downconverter Figure 4 6 IF Cabling Example Single Transponder Configuration Without CRS 280 280L Connections shown for 1 N 1 RM with TMs and 8 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 1IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 3 2 IF Cable Connections Multiple Transponder Using IF Switch The CRS 280 IF 70 140 MHz Switch provides complete isolation of the IF signals The Redundant Modem s IF signals are routed to the Traffic Modem s IF path when the Switch RMI is online The Switch automatically senses the presence of the CRS 280 The Switch upon switching leaves the offline modem with its IF on and the CRS 280 s relays isolate any undesired signals Figure 4 7 provides a generic example of multiple transponder IF connections in this instance a 1 1 configuration using a CRS 280 IF Switch with CDM 600 modems Using PL 0946 2 50Q or PL 0813 8 750 BNC to BNC IF cables observe the following for all modem switch configurations From the Redundant Modem e Connect the Rx IF
150. acement and removal of the Switch into a rack e Mount all Switches and modems in the rack as necessary Use the mounting holes on the product front panels to secure the primary equipment to the rack front mounting rails with your user supplied fasteners e You can mount the CRS 280 IF Switch at the back or on top of the rack If you use the CRS 280L refer also to the associated CRS 280L 1 N Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual MN CRS280L IOM for further rack mounting information e CRS 350 mounts at the back of the rack The CRS 350 mounting brackets allow you to hinge the unit down This facilitates access to the interface connectors at the rear of the CRS 350 and makes cable connections easy between the CRS 350 CRS 300 and modems A CAUTION When installing the equipment into a rack enclosure e PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED The equipment must be connected to the protective earth connection at all times It is therefore imperative that the unit is properly grounded using the ground stud provided on the unit rear panels during installation configuration and operation CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Installation Revision 19 e PROPER AIR VENTILATION IS REQUIRED o Air temperature inside the rack enclosure should NEVER exceed 50 C 122 F o Since the Switch itself is relatively passive no additional clearance is needed between it and the nearest modem o CRS 300 CANNOT h
151. adapts the HD 15 Fault connector on the Switch TMI RMI to the DB 15 Alarms connectors on the modem mod and demod modules These interfaces are capable of CnC support Pe d P1 i 3 7 a 1 15 PIN 2X 15 PIN TYPE HD MALE TYPE D FEMALE 2 TWISTED PAIRS 4 TWISTED PAIRS Figure B 11 CDM Qx QxL with CnC Y Control Cable CA WR12069 1 B 13 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 9 Switch to Modem Control Cable for CDM 7XX HD 15M gt DB 15F You may use this cable to connect the Switch to the CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 and CDM 700 Modems P1 TYPE HD 15 PIN MALE TYPE D FEMALE Figure B 12 CDM 7XX Control Cable CA WR12361 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 Control IF Data Cables amp Accessories CEFD PIN DESCRIPTION ES FOR TRAFFIC USED WITH CRS 300 gt CRS 280 4 1 CRS 280L 4 2 Control CRS 350 4 3 CRS 350 gt CRS 280 4 4 CRS 350 gt CRS 280L 4 5 4 9 Control Data CDM 625 A zal 13 CA WRO066 DB 25F gt DB 25M 6 4 11 4 12 Control EIA 422 Data CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL 4 15 EIA 422 Data EIA 530 232 SLM 5650 5650A 4 16 ESC Data SLM 5650 5650A gt CRS 350 4 19 EIA 422 Data CDM Qx QxL 4 21 Control EIA 422 Data CDM 600 L 4 36 Control CDM 600 L
152. ake sure to select and Save the exe or zip archive file to the temp folder created earlier Otherwise click Cancel to quit and exit the file download process 2 Extract the firmware files from the downloaded exe or zip archive file with the user supplied Utility Application if not already done with File Download gt Open Using the CDM 625 A firmware download archive for the Switch as an example at least four files should be extracted A pcc rm He CCCFLSHC EXE Application FW 0000092H CRS 300 CDM625 02 24 CCC File A FW 0000092H ReleaseNotes v224 pdf Adobe Acrobat Document e CCCflash hlp The CEFD Flash Upload Utility Application Help File e CCCFlash exe or CCCFLSHC EXE The CEFD Flash Upload Utility Application compatible for use under Windows 95 98 2000 or Windows e FW 0000092 ccc The firmware image file e FW 0000092 _ReleaseNotes_V pdf The firmware release notes 3 Confirm availability of the firmware files in the temporary folder There are a number of ways you may view the contents of the temporary folder on a Windows based PC A From the Windows Desktop e Double left click the temp folder saved to the Windows Desktop e Use Windows Explorer to locate and then double left click the temp folder e Use the Browse window Start gt Run gt Browse to locate and then double click the c temp folder B Using Command line e cd c
153. ancy Switch Revision 19 Cables and Connections CDM 700 connected to CRS 306 RM ee D aom CA WR12361 1 CA RF12279 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED CA WR9189 6 D c 2 y J 2 _ 5 s c m HSS User Data f TAzz 2l1 2l74 33 Unbal G 703 User Data zd m 7 8 uL Da 3 es p CA RF12278 1 4 OF 8 BNCs USED a CA WR12361 1 T T CA WR9189 6 ee y CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 3 Figure 4 31 Control and Traffic Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to CDM 700 Connections shown for RMI and TMls 3 and 8 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 700 connected to CRS 306 RMI LE A m CA WR12361 1 l OC3 Copper 1 User Data 2X PL 0813 8 1 4 E __ E J J F Gj 27 m Ethernet User Data acea CAIWR12361 1 PP CAT5FF7FTGY Modele T QUU AD mg jp CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 8 CA WR12361 1 PP CATSFF7FTGY JE bh gt P ae By No SS cm CDM 700 connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 CA WR12361 1 2X PL 0813 8 CDM 700 connected to CRS 325 TMI 1 Figure 4 32 CDM 700 IP Connections Wired thru Example 1 Connections shown for RMI and 1 3 and 8 only 4 80 CRS 3
154. annot be polled directly automatically by the modem gt For fault status use OUS query when the modem ODU control is to the online modem enabled so it is important that the modem be configured first CSAT 1 7914 CSAT 2 7915 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0911 MCA 7911 EDMAC slave Modem 9 RCA 0 MCA 7900 EDMAC master ESA 0910 Modem 2 CSAT 1 8014 ES Modem 1 ESA MCA 1011 CSAT 2 8015 MCA 8011 Modem 2 EDMAC slave 10 RCA 0 8000 EDMAC master ESA 1010 Redundant RCA 0 Modem MCA 8100 Serial comm via LEGEND 11 EDMAC as 15 25 pin cables Traffic Modem MCA Address used by user for Monitor amp Control applications for Switch and Traffic Modems For the Local Trafficmodems use ESA and any back up will be transparent to the M amp C application To address the Redundant Modem directly e g to check it is fault free use MCA RCA MCA 7000 RCA Address used for comms between Switch and modems set via modem front panels ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range set via Traffic Modem front panels External RS 485 Serial connection Figure C 2 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 485 with CDM 625 A 570 A 570L AL 600 L Modems C 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix C External RS 232 Serial connection LOCAL END Hub Modem 1 RCA 0 MCA 0100 Modem 2 RCA 0 MCA 02
155. arameters as desired In the event that a second fault occurs another way to influence Switch behavior is via Priority Mode For detailed information on Priority Mode see Sect 6 2 2 3 1 CONFIG OPTIONS PRIORITY 5 29 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Notes 5 30 Chapter 6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION 6 1 Overview OMH CRS 300 REDUNDANCY SWITCH in I 1 reyr eS See 4 m um um um um um eee st vsus TRANSIT PROMPT mansur nou fective PROMPT receve coto e i T 2 3 to OOt us US mm um o Switch Status LED Indicators These LEDs show the summary status of the Switch Modem Status LED Indicators These LEDs show the summary status of the Traffic and Redundant modems em eoooeoo eoeo0000 00000 eeeed 000000 000000 000000 000000 um m m m The VFD shows data menus prompts an
156. are available If the selected location does not contain a previously stored configuration this message displays YOUR CONFIGURATION HAS BEEN STORED ENTER Press ENT or CLR to return to the previous menu If however the selected location contains a previously stored configuration this message displays WARNING LOC 10 CONTAINS DATA OVERWRITE NO YES 6 20 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select NO or YES and then press ENT If you select YES this will overwrite the existing configuration at the selected location 6 2 5 2 STORE LD LOAD LOAD CONFIGURATION FROM LOCATION 10 ENTER Use the A arrow keys to select the location from where to load the desired configuration and then press ENT Locations 1 through 10 are available If the location contains a valid stored configuration this message displays THE NEW CONFIGURATION HAS BEEN LOADED ENTER Press ENT or CLR to return to the previous menu If however the selected location does not contain a previously stored configuration this message displays WARNING LOC 10 CONTAINS NO DATA ENTER Press ENT or CLR to return to the previous menu 6 2 6 SELECT UTILITY UTILITY SET RTC DISPLAY SWITCH ID TEST RELAY ENT Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT This submenu permits you to select from a number of different utili
157. arrier Detect lock Nts 1 2 oe 108 DCE 21 25 60 Signal Ground Notes 1 Noted signal function names are non HSSI defined signals On Cisco routers there is no connection to those pins 2 TTL output 3 TTL or EIA 232 active low input CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 9 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connector RJ 45F CRS 316 336 See Table 3 12 for the RJ 45F connector pinouts for the 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet User Data Interface used for Ethernet Bridge Mode connector J4 on the CRS 316 and CRS 336 TMs Table 3 12 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connector Pinouts 3 13 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 10 Quad E1 Connectors RJ 48F CRS 365 m um mm Um Em um 1 pp Pon 1 Traffic Modem Inttc TMi CRS 365 See Table 3 13 for the RJ 48F connector pinouts for the Quad E1 User Data Interface Ports 1 through 4 on the CRS 365 TMI Table 3 13 Quad E1 Connector Pinouts Typical Ports 1 through 4 Signal Function where Port m 2 3 or 4 Port oa Port Rx Port CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 11 Quad E1 Connectors DB 9F CRS 365D Ports 1 amp 2 orts t Trattic Modem Intfc TMi E p Jam bc ol User interface E 12 Modem intertace 21 3
158. ata Connections CRS 300 to User e ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems e User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 11 CDM 600 L Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling and power up sequence must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This sequence is described in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems Traffic modems with differing data types can all be supported by the Redundant Modem 4 11 1 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems Q See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the CDM 600 L modems The 25 pin Control Data Cable CA WROO66 provides the EIA 422 232 LVDS traffic data path and serial communication path between the Switch and the modems Therefore you must alwys use this cable even when the data type is G 703 D The Switch TMls feature jumpers that pre set to ensure proper operation with the following traffic data e For EIA 422 RTS CTS DTR DSR signals using the CRS 340 e For HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 370 See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information See Figure 4 36 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO6
159. ater 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 4 or later Note When using GigE F W Ver 1 2 3 is not compatible with the Switch TIS CDM 600 1 1 5 or later N A CDM 600L 1 1 1 or later N A SLM5650 5650A Firmware and Hardware Requirements In order to support the desired redundancy you must load the appropriate firmware into the SLM 5650 5650A base modem Network Processor if applicable and Switch Higher versions of the firmware continue support for the given interface i e the highest version supports all interfaces The lowest firmware versions that you require to support a given interface type are Network SLM 5650 SLM 5650A 10 100 1000 Base T Base Modem Base Modem GbE Interface card eee Serial 232 551 1 2 4 1 1 1 N A N A 2 1 7 Ethernet Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode using 10 100 1000 Base T card ite ate and Ethernet Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode using Port 1 of 4 port NP Module i wa 181 SE CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 2 2 1 Update Your Modem Firmware Comtech EF Data ships its products with the latest version of operating firmware If you need to update your modem firmware you may download the update from the Comtech EF Data Web site www comtechefdata com You may also receive the firmware update archive file via e mail from Comtech EF Data Product Support
160. ation on this method see Appendix A ETHERNET NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS in this manual For the wired thru connection see Figure 4 29 and do these steps to connect and secure the 5 Data Cable PP CAT5FF7FTGY RJ 45 to RJ 45 7 between the Switch and each CDM 710 e RJ 45 connector labeled J5 the Switch RMI or TMI s to e RJ 45 connector labeled J1 on the CDM 700 CDI 70 plug in module 4 69 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 9 6 User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the external router multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data Interface connectors Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the CDM 710 modems 2X PL 0813 8 CA WR12361 1 e kt Or z b ME Cie CDM 710 connected to CRS 325 TMI 4 CA WR12361 1 2X PL 0813 8 a 2 7 E i 4 EIE Ra o CDM 710 connected to CRS 325 cri H Figure 4 28 Control and Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to CDM 710 Connections shown for RMI amp TMi
161. ave rack slides mounted to the sides of the chassis air flow must not be impeded Comtech EF Data recommends that an alternate method of support is provided within the rack such as standard rack shelves as needed o Make sure there is adequate clearance inside the enclosure especially at the sides for air ventilation In a rack system where there is high heat discharge provide forced air cooling with top or bottom mounted fans or blowers For information about custom rack enclosures contact Comtech EF Data Product Support CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Installation 50 C 122 F AMAA AMAA Q LAM IL ee AYE 8 wem Wo B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Custom Rack Enclosure side view L3 Standard Rack Shelving ENF NI Mounting Rail typical 5 User supplied Screws Sm eee eee Gm p cmm um um um um um UM UM UD UN mmm m m mmm mmm mmm mw Figure 2 2 Typical Rack Mounting Configuration 2 4 Chapter 3 SWITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS 3 1 Cabling Connection Types The cable and connector types described in this section are commonly used in many Comtech EF Data products Each cable type is typically dedicated to a specific mode of operation The plug in interface cards including the CRS 230 System Controller card and a variety of Traffic Modem
162. c Modem MCA Address used by user for Monitor amp Control applications for Switch and Traffic Modems For the Local Trafficmodems use ESA and any back up will be transparent to the M amp C application To address the Redundant Modem directly e g to check it is fault free use MCA CRS 300 SWITCH RCA MCA 0 RCA Address used for comms between Switch and modems set via modem front panels ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range set via Traffic Modem front panels Figure C 1 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 232 with CDM 625 A 570 A 570L AL 600 L Modems C 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 LOCAL END Hub DISTANT END Remotes _ _ CSAT 1 7101 CSAT 1 7114 1 0 2 7102 2 7115 1 0111 7100 7111 EDMAC master Modem 2 EDMAC slave ESA 0110 1 7201 csaa 2 7202 7214 CSAT 2 7215 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0211 MCA 7211 Modem 2 slave Modem 2 RCA 0 MCA 7200 EDMAC master ESA 0210 RCA 0 MCA 7300 EDMAC master ESA 0310 CSAT 1 7314 CSAT 2 7315 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0311 MCA 7311 Modem 2 EDMAC slave Modem 3 Distant end offline modem of a CSAT addresses are set 1 1 pair c
163. ccepted a fault will be shown on the display Press ENT or CLR to return to the top level main menu 6 2 6 5 UTILITY RELAY POWER OFF RELAY LOGIC DEFAULT INVERT ENT The alarm relay condition terms Normally Open and Normally Closed are easily misinterpreted To facilitate customer connection to existing external equipment you may use this menu to invert the logic of the external relay condition Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select DEFAULT or INVERT and then press ENT 6 22 Chapter 7 SERIAL BASED REMOTE PRODUCT 7 1 7 2 MANAGEMENT Overview The CRS 300 1 10 Redundacy Switch serial remote product management interface is an electrical interface that is either an EIA 485 multi drop bus for the control of multiple devices or an EIA 232 connection for the control of a single device The interface transmits data in asynchronous serial form using ASCII characters This data consists of control and status information transmitted in packets of variable length in accordance with the structure and protocol explained later in this chapter See Sect 3 2 1 3 Remote Control Connector DB 9M in Chapter 3 S WITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS for the EIA 232 and EIA 485 connector pinouts Table 3 2 EIA 485 For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled a full duplex or 4 wire plus ground EIA 485 is preferred Half duplex 2 wire plus ground EIA 485 is possible but is not preferred
164. cecesseecseeeesecesseeens 5 3 5 2 4 1 1 Configure CDM 625 A 1 N Redundancy for 5 4 5 2 4 2 Configure Switch to CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L 1 N Redundancy 5 5 5 2 4 3 Configure Switch to SLM 5650 5650A 1 N Redundancy 5 5 5 2 4 4 Configure Switch to CDM Qx QxL 1 N Redundangy cccescecsseceescecesseecseeeeseeeeeeeens 5 7 5 2 4 5 Configure Switch to CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CDM 700 1 N Redundancy 5 10 5 3 RMI Card Configuration Reference scccsssscccsssssccccssssccccssssecesssssccaassssscensssssceesssseeaeaes 5 11 5 4 TMI Card Configuration Reference ssccccssssscccssssccccssssccccacsscccacssseccecssseccensssessansssseeaes 5 12 5 4 1 530 Interfaces via the CRS 316 TMl cccccccccssssssscecececessesssaeeeeeescesseesaeeeeeeseessesneaeeeeess 5 12 5 4 2 EIA 232 422 V 35 Interfaces via the CRS 320 and CRS 340 5 5 15 5 4 3 HSSI Interfaces via the CRS 336 TM 5 17 5 4 4 HSSI Interface via the CRS 370 TMar anene a a a a a iai 5 19 5 5 Configure the CRS 300 Switch sseessssesssossssoossssossessooseseoosessoosesoosessoosessoosessossessossessese 5 20 5 5 1 Connectthe Switch Power iranti ee i i a a a aa aati i a E A nn 5 20 5 5 2 About the
165. ch Configuration in this chapter All cables required for the connection of control IF and traffic data between the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch and the modems or within the system are available from Comtech EF Data You may contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to purchase any cables that are specified throughout this chapter If you use user fabricated cables the cables between each modem and Switch RMI or TMI plug in module interface card should be of shielded twisted pair construction with the grounded shield bonded to the back shell You must wire all data cables correctly using the pinout and connection information that is provided in Chapter 3 SWITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS or Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 When you connect your cabling in most cases the modem accepts the male end of the cable while connectors on the Switch RMI or TMI plug in card accept the female end of the cable in the section of the module labeled Modem Interface See the subsections in Sect 1 4 Description of CRS 300 Features for detailed information on these interfaces The figures throughout this chapter provide cabling configuration examples for Switch RMI or TMI interfaces i e the interconnection of a Redundant Modem to a Switch RMI module or the interconnection between a Switch TMI module and a Traffic Modem See these chapter sections for step by step in
166. codes 13 10 1 character 4 characters 1 character 3 characters 1 character From 0 to n characters 2 characters Example gt 0000 BBU 107 CRHLF 7 5 1 1 Start of Packet e Controller to Target This is the character lt ASCII code 60 e Target to Controller This is the character gt ASCII code 62 The lt and gt characters indicate the start of packet They may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message 7 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 7 5 1 2 Target Address While up to 9 999 devices can be uniquely addressed connection to the CRS 300 imposes some basic limitations e n EIA 232 applications the Switch address is fixed at 0000 e In EIA 485 applications the Switch may be set to an address of 1000 3000 5000 or 7000 This allows up to four Switches to be connected on the same bus e The 11 modems that may be connected to the Switch may be accessed for remote monitor amp control through the Switch via virtual addresses The details of this addressing scheme is shown in Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION Valid remote commands and queries that can be sent to the modems via the Switch depend upon the modem protocol and the installed options Consult the appropriate modem nstallation and Operation Manual for further information Regardless of the Switch COMMs being set up for either EIA 232 or EIA 485
167. ction between the Switch and the CDM 625 A Modem 1 9 PIN 15 PIN TYPE D TYPE D 72 00 3 00 2e MALE FEMALE WIRE LIST COMMENTS TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR SHIELD ITEM 8 Figure B 18 CDM 625 A Bal G 703 Data Cable CA 0000072 B 23 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 B 4 7 Switch to Modem Modem to User Gigabit Ethernet Quad E1 RJ 48 Connector Cable RJ 48M gt RJ 48M You may use this cable for Gigabit Ethernet data connections for the SLM 5650 5650A CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 and CDM 700 Modems and for Quad E1 data connections for the CDM Qx QxL Modems 84 00 R m WM In xc mm 1234 5675 RJ 48 RJ 48 MALE MALE T568B Wiring Diagram Blue White tracer Blue Orange White tracer Orange Green White tracer Green 350 MHz Category 5E Patch Cable Specs Brown White tracer Brown EIA TIA TSB 40A ETL Verified Contact Gold Plating 50 Short body Assembly Strain Relief Stranded 50dB RoHS Compliant Length 7 ft Figure B 19 Quad E1 GigE Connector Cable PP CAT5FF7FTGY CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix B MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 B 4 8 Switch to Modem HSSI Data Cable HD 50M HD 50M You may use this Type 50 pin cable for HSSI data connections between
168. ction to the Traffic Modem s IDR Audio and Overhead ports See Figure 1 24 in Sect 1 5 CRS 350 ESC Switch Description for detailed information on this interface Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface 4 88 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA WR9932 1 CA WR9038 6 CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 350 RMI ih m CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 350 TMI 1 Figure 4 37 Cabling Example for CRS 350 to CDM 600 L Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 89 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 4 90 Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION 5 1 Overview n In order to avoid damage to both the Switch and the modems it is important that you do these steps in sequence First mount the Switch and all modems as instructed in Chapter 2 INSTALLATION Next connect your control IF and traffic data cabling between the powered OFF modems and the Switch as instructed in Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS Leave the Switch and all modems powered off until all connections are ready Then configure your modems for 1 N redundant operation as instructed in this chapter in Sect 5 2 Configure Your Modems Then if needed configure y
169. cy system Taking this prohibition of use under further consideration the CiM 25 should not under any circumstances be connected to the Remote port on the CRS 300 s CRS 230 Controller card for control of the Switch and modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Introduction Revision 19 1 3 Description of CRS 300 Features 1 3 1 Front Panel Figure 1 3 shows the CRS 300 Front Panel features and the manual chapter sections where you may reference additional information about that feature The CRS 300 is constructed as a 4RU high rack mounting chassis that can be freestanding if desired I 1 Comme iem r Ja CRS 300 i I I r switcH I 1 I I 1 e eo 6 O versus I 1 I E i wv 9 5 9 5 n i T oi Qu EF I t Q ommno r i I E ove og IL o 6 1 1 od EA 1 a a 1 4 4 i I Unit States LED Indicators These LEDs show a summary status of the Switch Modem Status LED Indicators These LEDs show a summary status of the Traffic and Redundant modems Use the keypad to enter data The keypad has six 3 Keypad individual key switches mounted behind a sealed membrane overlay The keys have a positive click action that give
170. d messages The VFD Vacuum Fluorescent Display is an active display with adjustable brightness It shows two lines VFD of 24 characters each Nested menus show all available options and prompts that guide you in carrying out required actions Use the keypad to enter data The keypad has six individual key Keypad switches mounted behind a sealed membrane overlay The keys have a positive click action that gives tactile feedback Figure 6 1 CRS 300 Front Panel Features CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 1 1 Front Panel LED Indicators 6 1 1 1 Switch Status LED Indicators These three front panel LEDs are located adjacent to the keypad They show the operational status of the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch onn sratus stoneo event Q or The LEDs function individually as follows Green Normal operation no Switch Faults UNIT STATUS Switch Fault e g PSU fault COMMS failure lof No Stored Events Switch has Stored Events STORED EVENT Orange CAUTION Switch is in MANUAL mode Flashing Switch is in Local Mode remote monitoring is possible but remote configuration control is not allowed REMOTE TTE 7 Switch is in Remote Mode configuration changes are disabled via the Orange front panel keypad 6 2 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 1 1 2 Modem Status LED Indicato
171. d the user data NOTES USE METAL BACKSHELLS FOR D TYPE CONNECTORS ENSURE SHIELDING FOIL AND OR BRAID IS BONDED TO METAL BACKSHELL FOR EMC SHIELDING TX CLOCK 24 et SUME TX DATA 2 TX DATA B 14 L L L TWISTED PAIR Y l35 TWISTED PAR 11 DATA MODE A 12 TERM READY A 29 DATA MODE B 30 TERM READY B TX CLOCK A TX CLOCK B TX DATA A TX DATA B w RX CLOCK 9 RX CLOCK B RX DATA 3 ED iy RX DATA A o RX DATA B RX DATA z INT TX CLK A 15 INT TX CLK A TX CLK B12L INT TX CLK B AP REV READY A 8 i RCV READY RCV READY SET RCV READY B 7 7 dms Fi NON OVERALL SHIELD LINK TOGETHER IN SHELL a 25 PIN TYPE D 37 PIN TYPE D FEMALE MALE WITH FEMALE SCREWLOCKS So 40 0 Bes BB BACKSHELL BACKSHELL Figure B 1 DCE Conversion Cable EIA 530 to 422 449 B 2 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 2 2 Switch to User EIA 530 to V 35 Data Conversion Cable DB 25M Winchester 34F This cable provides the EIA 530 to V 35 DCE conversion for connections between the Switch and the user data OVERALL SHIELD 25 TYPE 0 34 PIN MALE WINCHESTER LENG
172. dem to User IF Cable BNC 500 B 19 B 4 3 Switch to Modem ASI Balanced G 703 IF Cable BNC 750 B 20 B 4 4 Modem to Modem Multi Drop CnC Plus Shielded Data Cable for CDM 625 A 11X DB 9M 21 B 4 5 Modem to User Ethernet Data Cable for 625 45 50 B 22 B 4 6 Switch to Modem Balanced G 703 Data Cable for CDM 625 A DB 15F gt DB 15M B 23 B 4 7 Switch to Modem Modem to User Gigabit Ethernet Quad E1 RJ 48 Connector Cable SE 48 ds B 24 B 4 8 Switch to Modem HSSI Data Cable HD 50M HD 50M esee B 25 B 4 9 Switch to Modem Quad E1 Data Y Cable for CDM 625 A DB 15F 2X DB 9M B 26 B 4 10 Modem to User Quad E1 Data Cable for CDM 625 A 9 gt 9 B 27 B 4 11 Modem to User Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable for CDM 625 A DB 9M 2X DB 15F B 28 B 4 12 Modem to User Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable for CDM 625 A DB 9M 2X RJ 48F B 29 B 4 13 Modem to Switch CDM 625 A to CRS 350 Overhead Data Cable DB 44M DB 9M DB 9F DB 25M DB 15F cccscccsccesscssscssscesseecseecseecseecsaecsaeceaeceaecaesseesseesseesseaescseeeauesaaeeaass B 30 B 4 14 Switch to User Switch to Modem Balanced G 703 Data C
173. dems A transceiver s address will be set automatically by its controlling modem if connected via the FSK link when the ODU Enable is configured e Local Transceiver 1 linked to Modem m on the Switch o First set up the modem RCA as described in Section C 2 o Onthe modem key to Enable ODU The modem automatically sets the transceiver address Transceiver MCA Modem RCA 1 e Local Transceivers 1 amp 2 1 1 configuration attached to Modem m on the Switch o First set up the modem RCA as described in Section C 2 o Onthe online modem key to Enable ODU The modem automatically sets the transceiver addresses MCA of Transceiver 1 Modem RCA 1 MCA of Transceiver 2 Modem RCA 2 e Distant Transceiver 1 standalone o First set up the modems first as described earlier in this section o Onthe modem key to Enable ODU MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Revision 19 Appendix C The modem automatically sets the transceiver address Transceiver MCA Master ESA 4 Slave ESA 3 e Distant Transceivers 1 amp 2 1 1 configuration o First set up the modem as described earlier in this section o Onthe modem key to Enable ODU The modem automatically sets the transceiver addresses MCA of Transceiver 1 Master ESA 4 MCA of Transceiver 2 Master ESA 5 C 4 M amp C Applications The system is set up such that it may be communicated to by an M amp C application e g SatMac or C
174. dundancy on each modem to the Active state CONFIG gt AUX Redundancy Mode gt ENA DIS gt set to Enable Press ENT to save your changes You are not required to configure any further COMM menus for the modems Power down all modems Power up all modems Verify that each Traffic Modem is ONLINE via the front panel LEDs All configuration changes can only be made to the Online CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 or CDM 700 and will require you to Save Parameters to permanent storage to make sure the configuration change is also applied to the Redundant Modem See the CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 or CDM 700 Installation and Operation Manuals for detailed configuration information Ob CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 3 RMI Card Configuration Reference Comtech EF Data provides this RMI Card Configuration Reference for RMI n identification purposes only Comtech EF Data ships all RMI cards pre configured they require no user adjustments Comtech EF Data ships the CRS 305 CRS 306 and CRS 307 RMI cards pre set for proper operation Each card shares a common printed circuit board CEFD P N PC 11494x what distinguishes the cards from one another is the configuration of front panel connectors and configuration of the Jumper JMP1 setting on the PCB Figure 5 3 identifies the JMP1 jumper location that typical for all RMI PCBs e c VEEvYYILH3IdVHO 33S
175. e DAY 240457 would be April 24 2057 Query only Unit returns information concerning the equipment identification Example S300 Response to Command Target to Controller CLD message OK CLD received OK but invalid arguments found CLD message OK but the memory location does not contain configuration info CST message OK CST received OK but invalid arguments found CST message OK but only permitted in Remote mode DAY message OK DAY received OK but invalid arguments DAY message OK but only permitted in Remote mode Query Code and qualifier CST n where n is 0to9 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Response to query Target to Controller Returns the same format as the SGC with the form CSTzxxx xxx for a valid config and CST where no valid config is found DAY ddmmyy see Description of Arguments EID xxxx see Description of Arguments CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 Arguments for Command or Command Parameter Type Code and qualifier Description of Arguments Response to Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes E that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Faults and Status 15 bytes Query only FLT rAaBbCcDdEeFfmi alphanumeric Unit returns the current fault and status codes for the Switch see Description of itself where Arguments r Redundant Modem 0 OK 1 RMI not prese
176. e Connections CRS 300 to 4 69 4 9 4 Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 69 4 9 5 Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 69 4 9 6 User Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 70 4 10 700 Modem 4 74 4 10 1 RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations 4 74 vi 5 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 4 10 2 iere en ri de eder EX a eaae rb eade e EXE RENE 4 74 4 10 3 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems sseeseeeeneenennnnnnnnnnn 4 75 4 10 4 Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 75 4 10 5 Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems seen 4 76 4 10 5 1 Wired thru Connections ccccccccccecsssessnsececccececsessaaeeececssesseaeseeeeeceseeaaeseeeessessessaaeees 4 76 4 10 5 2 Wired around Connections e
177. e Figure 4 20 and do these steps to connect the EIA 485 multi drop cable between the Switch and the modems e Connect and secure 1 CA WR11418 1 EIA 485 terminator on each far end DB 9F connector of the appropriate EIA 485 multi drop cable the standard CA WR11417 1 shielded cable or the optional CA RB11423 1 ribbon cable e Connect and secure one end of the Null Modem Cable CA WR11419 1 to the DB 9F connector labeled 485 Pass Through on the Switch s CRS 230 System Controller e Connect and secure the EIA 485 multi drop cable to all CDM Qx QxL modems and to the DB 9M connector on the Null Modem Cable CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 RMI dRUL ome ni L ST v jo CA WR11417 1 Multi drop Shielded Cable standard OR CA RB11423 1 Multi drop Ribbon Cable optional Figure 4 20 EIA 485 Multi drop Cabling Example CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 and 3 only 4 53 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 7 3 4 7 4 Control Y Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems All traffic data configurations require the Control Y Cable CA WR12069 1 Do these steps to connect Switch RMI TMI s and each CDM Qx QxL e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15M connectors labeled Alarms on each CDM Qx QxL modulator and demodulat
178. e User Data Connections CRS 300 to User e ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems e User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User 4 41 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Cables and Connections 4 6 4 6 1 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 SLM 5650 5650A Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing Traffic Modem The cabling power up sequence and communication connections must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This information is detailed in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations Some consideration must be made when choosing which TMIs can be mixed within the same Switch Because the Switch RMIs CRS 306 307 cannot provide connections to all of the data types on the SLM 5650 5650A Redundant Modem the customer must choose which RMI card is the best choice for use with the Switch This will then dictate which TMIs that the Switch can support 1 2 3 4 You must equip your Redundant Modem with the same option card s as any Traffic Modem The Switch TMls feature jumpers that are pre set to ensure proper operation with the following traffic data e For EIA 422 with RTS CTS DTR DSR signals using the CRS 316 e For HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 336 See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration inf
179. e and qualifier Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Query Code and qualifier Response to Command Target to Controller Response to query Target to Controller A 1 A 2 Appendix A ETHERNET NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS Overview For operations requiring Ethernet based terrestrial data handling it is important to emphasize the need for you to avoid Ethernet looping connection problems with or without use of the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch The intent of this appendix is to outline the differing methods for Ethernet based data handling with the various modems featured throughout this manual Additionally this appendix outlines use of the CDM 700 Satellite Modem in redundancy The CDM 700 provides the added functionality of multiple data type handling simultaneously with Ethernet i e Ethernet amp HSSI Ethernet amp G 703 etc Ethernet Routers vs Switches Routers and switches allow connection of one or more computers or networked devices to other computers or network devices Each has two or more connectors called ports in which cables connect to other network devices An Ethernet router determines where to forward IP traffic based upon the destination IP address and the Route table entries in the router An Ethernet router can be programmed to understand and route the data it is directed to handle for example broadband rou
180. e must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This sequence is described in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations With some exceptions Traffic modems with differing data types can all be supported by the Redundant Modem See Table 4 1 for the Switch RMI 5 and cables that you will need to set up a proper redundant system configuration As shown and regardless of driving traffic data type the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch uses the CRS 310 Redundant Modem Interface RMI for all driving traffic configurations When you use the CDM 625 A in a CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy System you may mix TMs within the same Switch with some limitations For example while you may use the P2 DB 15M connector on the CRS 310 RMI for Balanced Unbalanced G 703 or Quad E1 traffic you may use only one of these two traffic data types within the Switch TMIs Accordingly for a Switch that uses any combination of the CRS 325 CRS 330 or CRS 340 TMISs for Balanced Unbalanced G 703 traffic you may not install the CRS 365D TMI for Quad E1 traffic in the same system See Figure 4 9 through Figure 4 11 for graphic examples of this operational dependency each figure shows the Switch TMI types that you may use with the Traffic Modems n 1 The Switch TMIs feature jumpers that are pre set to ensure proper operation for the following traffic data e For EIA 422 with RTS CTS
181. ech EF Data to adapt the Balanced G 703 DB 15F connector on the User Data side of the Switch TMI to a RJ 48 female connection CDM 570 570L connected to CRS 310 RMI EIA 422 232 User Data ley KA amp CAIWR11999 6 yy 2 Bal G 703 User Data CS x 4 m V E1A 422 232 User Data L i 8 oe oe A 1 9 gu DC Power rera he 7031 User Data CA WRO066 CA WR11999 6 Oum mg o LE mic 5 102 itr Dee CDM 570 570L connected to CRS 340 TMI 5 CA WRO0066 CA WR11999 6 Nom Ss IEEE OE gt EO CA WRO0066 ae z LI AS CDM 570 570L connected to CRS 320 OBSOLETE TMI 1 Figure 4 15 Data Cable Connection Example CRS 300 to CDM 570 A or CDM 570L AL Connections shown for RMI and 1 3 and 5 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 4 40 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 6 SLM 5650 5650A Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations e Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems
182. ection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 280 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA WROO66 p EHE 1 CRS CONTROL INTERFACE L DANGER J HIGH VOLTAGE mans a Figure 4 2 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 280L CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 y CRS 230 System Controller pu M A T Te 4 4 i PU Somn At Tay 00 a quu a 4 umi EM Figure 4 3 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to CRS 350 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CRS 350 ESC Switch Rear Panel M Te Teste Te Tutte Te treme Te To Toute 00m Modem t Mode e Mod et ta sem f oq Pe ee e a namq 2 2 GEN 3 JF HH i A 1 1 E c e c LJ B NO P 2 LIN LT t t t p rE i H H iu N e TTA Im MM penso 17 CA WRO0066 CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch Rear Panel pa Er ee mama cassa vn camm Re asm BY MANUFACTURED IN THE USA BY COMTECH EF DATA CORPORATION o2 n st Figure 4 4 Control Cable Connection Example for CRS 300 to
183. ectly on the modem Unmasked modem O These selections are global to all the modems If masking of individual modem faults are logged on active modems only CONFIG OPTIONS gt ALARM MASK gt SW ALARMS SWITCH ALARM MASK NONE PSU A PSU BN ENTER Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select NONE PSU A or PSU BN and then press ENT You may select which of the plug in power supply units to mask Only one of the units can be masked at a time if needed This would normally be done if you choose to run with only one supply or if you remove a faulty supply for service or replacement CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 CONFIG OPTIONS gt ALARM MASK AUDIO AUDIO MASK NONE SW ALMS MODEM ALMS BOTH ENTER Use the lt gt arrow to select from the choices shown and then press ENT For all unmasked Switch or modem alarms you may select which alarm types should force the Switch to react with an audible buzzer located behind the front panel In addition a relay closure to ground activates on Pin 20 of the System Alarms connector so that you may attach other indicators 6 2 2 4 CONFIG REMOTE SELECT REMOTE CONTROL LOCAL REMOTE PRESS ENT Use the lt gt arrow keys to select LOCAL or REMOTE and then press ENT 6 2 2 4 1 CONFIG REMOTE gt LOCAL When you select LOCAL the Switch disables remote control although remote monitoring is always possible 6 2 2 4 2 CONFIG
184. edundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 48 CDM 710G 710GL Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling power up sequence and communication connections must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This information is detailed in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems 4 8 1 RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations n 1 Traffic modems with differing data types are not supported by the Redundant Modem For example the Switch can not be populated with Traffic modems with ASI and Traffic modes with HSSI 2 Depending on the traffic data type the appropriate jumper settings are provided on the Switch TMI to ensure proper operation for HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 336 TMI See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information 4 8 2 Interface Combinations The two plug in interface module slots in the CDM 710G 710GL allow for many possible interface card combinations Table 4 2 details the interface card combinations that are compatible with the Switch Table 4 2 CDM 710G 710GL Interface Card Combinations CDM 710G 710GL Unit Configuration 1 N CRS 300 Configuration Interface Slot 1 ac Slot 2 TMI Card RMI Card G 703 CDI 10 1 CRS 325 CRS 306 T be used as G 703 CDI 10 1 GigE CDI 70 E Unit HSSI CD60 CDI
185. ename this folder to temp or some other convenient unused name B Use Windows Command line to create the temporary folder e First click Start on the Windows taskbar and then click the Run icon or depending on Windows OS versions prior to Windows 95 click the MS Command line P rompt icon from the Main Menu 5 22 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 3 Next open a Command line window cont o For Windows 95 or Windows 98 type command o For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 type cmd or command o Alternately from Start select All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt Finally from the Command line prompt c gt type mkdir temp or md temp mkdir and md stand for make directory and then click OK C Use the Run and Browse windows to create and rename the temporary folder e Select Start on the Windows taskbar and then click the Run icon The Run window will open e Click Browse the Run window The Browse window will open e the Create New Folder icon in the Browse window The New Folder will be created Right click the New Folder folder name and then rename this folder to temp or some other convenient unused name There should now be a temp folder created and available for placement of the firmware archive file download
186. erates the CRS 300 Related Documents e Comtech EF Data CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM625A e Comtech EF Data CDM 625 Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM625 e Comtech EF Data CDM 570A CDM 570AL CDMR 570AL Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM570A e Comtech EF Data CDM 570 CDM 570L CDMR 570L Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM570L IOM e Comtech EF Data SLM 5650A Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN SLM56504A e Comtech EF Data SLM 5650 Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN SLM5650 IOM e Comtech EF Data CDM Qx QxL Multi Channel Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDMQX IOM e Comtech EF Data CDM 710G 710GL High Speed Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM710G e Comtech Data CDM 710 Broadcast Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM710 IOM xvii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Preface Revision 19 e Comtech EF Data CDM 700 High Speed Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM700 IOM e Comtech EF Data CDM 600 600L Open Network Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CDM6OOL IOM e Comtech EF Data CRS 280L 1 N Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P
187. erator to the connectors labeled User Data Interface on the Switch TMI s This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data Interface connectors n 1 Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted Traffic Modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface 2 Ensure that you correctly configure modem operation for Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 data For T1 E1 operation the optional CN 0000268 T1 E1 Adapter see Figure B 32 in Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS may be purchased from Comtech EF Data to adapt the Balanced G 703 DB 15F connector on the User Data side of the Switch TMI to a RJ 48 female connection 4 11 3 ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to Modems See Figure 4 37 and do these steps to connect and secure the cables between the CRS 350 and each CDM 600 L modem e Connect and secure the CA WROO66 cable o 25 connector on the CRS 350 to o DB 25M connectors labeled Overhead on the CDM 600 L e Connect and secure the CA WR9038 6 cable o DB 15M connector on the CRS 350 to o DB 15F connectors labeled P5A IDR Alarms on the CDM 600 L e Connect and secure the CA WR9932 1 cable o DB 9M connector on the CRS 350 to o DB 9F connectors labeled P4A Audio on the CDM 600 L 4 11 4 User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to User You must connect your equipment to the correct corresponding plug in module on the CRS 350 front panel This replaces the direct conne
188. es Example 2 CRS 300 to 1 5650 5650 4 47 Control and Data Cables Example 3 CRS 300 to 1 5650 5650 4 48 Cabling Example for SLM 5650 5650A to CRS 350 4 49 EIA 485 Multi drop Cabling Example CRS 300 4 53 Y Control Cables and EIA 530 232 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL 4 56 Y Control Cables and Balanced G 703 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL 4 57 Y Control Cables and Unbalanced G 703 Data Cables CRS 300 to CDM Qx QxL 4 58 Control Cables and HSSI Data Cables CRS 300 to 4 59 Control Cables and Quad E1 Data Cables CRS 300 to 4 60 Control and Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to 7106 71061 4 64 Control and Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to 7106 7106 4 65 Control Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to 710 4 70 Control and Data Cables Example 82 CRS 300 to 710 4 71 Control and Traffic Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to 700
189. fset 2 Modem 1 Not used Modem 1 RS485 Settings Address 0300 Offset 1 99 Note Modem 2 Not used 7 d T 1 e i Modem 2 RS485 Settings Modem 1 Not used Address 0098 Offset Figure 5 2 CDM Qx QxL CRS 300 EIA 485 Scheme CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 2 4 5 Configure Switch to CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 CDM 700 1 N Redundancy Only the Rev A modem chassis i e the chassis with a round buttoned front panel n keypad and later versions of the CDM 710 and CDM 700 offer 1 N Redundancy operation The Switch communicates to the Redundant and Traffic modems via a serial TTL bus contained within the CDM 710G 710GL CDM 710 or CDM 700 DB 15 P1 Alarms connector on the modem rear panel A DB 15 to HD 15 Control Cable connects each modem to the Switch Use the modem front panel menu to configure the modem and Switch for 1 N Redundancy make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task 1 If the terrestrial data type is Ethernet For each modem that is on the same subnet enter a unique IP Address for the CDI 70 GigE Interface e For the CDM 710G 710GL or CDM 710 CONFIG gt Intfc2 gt MAN gt ADDRESS e For the CDM 700 CONFIG gt Intfc1 gt MAN gt ADDRESS N Configure the DB 15 P1 Alarms connector on the modem rear panel for Redundancy Mode Set re
190. garding the CA WROO66 cable s use as a TMI control and or data cable see the data connection cabling instructions that follow for each driving traffic data type Additionally when you use the CRS 316 CRS 325 or CRS 336 TMI you must use the CA 0000069 HD 15M to DB 9M 6 Control Cable between the installed TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s See Table 4 1 in Sect 4 4 3 and read the data connection cabling instructions that follow for use of this cable with the pertinent driving traffic data type 4 4 3 2 G 703 Balanced Unbalanced Data Connections If G 703 Balanced Unbalanced is the driving traffic data type your means of interconnection depends on which Switch TMI is in use Figure 4 9 depicts use of the CRS 330 and CRS 340 5 for G 703 while Figure 4 10 depicts use of the CRS 325 TMI for G 703 G 703 traffic TMIs are not compatible with the CRS 365D Quad E1 traffic TMI when you use both TMIs within the same Switch Make all connections according to the information that follows gt If you use the CRS 330 or CRS 340 TMISs as shown in Figure 4 9 do these steps First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Next do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control purposes between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25
191. gt DB 9F You may use this Type D 9 pin cable for Audio data connections between the CRS 350 ESC Switch and CDM 600 L Modems Fe J0 3 00 Figure B 32 CDM 600 L Audio Data Cable CA WR9932 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 Notes B 38 C 1 Appendix C ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION Addressing Overview A CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch provides 1 10 redundancy that is you may use the CRS 300 to control one Redundant Modem and up to 10 Traffic Modems You can remotely communicate to the Switch or any of the modems via the DB 9 EIA 232 or EIA 485 remote connector on the CRS 230 Switch Controller card installed in the CRS 300 A direct User to modem connection is not permissible in this configuration master operation is restricted to the Switch in a redundancy system For Switch to modem communications with the CDM 625 A CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL SLM 5650 5650A CDM 710 CDM 700 and CDM 600 L modems the Switch uses serial communications via a DB 25 data cable or an HD 15 Control Cable that is connected between each modem and the Switch installed TMIs For Switch to modem communications with the CDM Qx QxL modems the Switch uses EIA 485 communications via a DB 9 multi drop cable that is connected from the 485 Pass Through connector on the CRS 230 and then daisy chained to each of the modems For modems that are conf
192. guration is that Switch 1 will send out an ARP request looking for a particular MAC then each subsequent switch passes along that request until Switch 1 receives it again At this point two things could happen 1 The switch could continue to forward all requests out all ports creating more and more traffic on the network until there is no bandwidth available and the switch either reboots or locks up 2 The switch could sense that the ARP request came back to the switch on a different port The switch could then stop forwarding traffic out the proper port Other factors will affect the network e g if the switch is running Spanning Tree Protocol VLANs etc A 3 2 Ethernet Redundancy with CRS 300 After the customer has determined the best configuration for near to far end Ethernet networks the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch may now be added to one or both ends of the link s Ethernet redundancy using the CRS 300 can be accomplished using a wired thru or wired around configuration A 3 2 1 Wired thru Connection This redundancy approach is the recommended and preferred connection method The wired thru Ethernet connection on the CRS 300 is the easiest and simplest choice for Ethernet redundancy This connection method the same as used on the standard serial data interface provides a single connection for the User Data Interface and provides simple form C relays that route the Ethernet connection from your connection
193. h Connector DB 9F c cccccccccsssssssecececeseeseseseceeseessessaaeseseessessessaaeeeeees 3 4 3 2 1 3 Remote Control Connector DB 9M sssssssseseserererererererererererererererererererererererererererereree 3 5 3 2 1 4 System Alarms Connector 25 enne nennen 3 6 3 2 2 TMI User Data Connectors isis daas seen sss r daarin iiSi nnn 3 7 3 2 2 1 EIA 232 422 V 35 Connector DB 25F 5 316 3 7 3 2 2 2 EIA 232 422 V 35 LVDS Connector DB 25F 320 340 3 8 3 2 2 3 ASI Connectors BNC CRS 325 c cccccsscccecssscececssececeeseeeceeaeeesecsaeeececsaeeeseesaeeeeeeaeeeeeees 3 9 3 2 2 4 8 kHz IDR Connector RJ 45F CRS 330 ccccccccssceceessececeesseceeecseceseeaeeeeseseeeeeesseeeeeees 3 9 3 2 2 5 Balanced G 703 Connector DB 15F 5 325 330 340 3 10 3 2 2 6 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors BNC CRS 325 330 340 3 11 3 2 2 7 Unbalanced G 703 4 Port Connectors BNC 5 345 3 11 3 2 2 8 HSSI Connector HD 50F CRS 336 370 csccccssscesssecesseecsececssecesseeesseeecaeeeesuecesseeenas 3 12 3 2 2 9 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connector RJ 45F 5 316 336 3
194. han those to global commands MGC More parameters require more time e A pass through command is passed with little inspection by the switch but remember the modem being addressed may be at the distant end of an EDMAC link Types of pass through commands Toalocal modem o Toamodem at the distant end EDMAC o Toalocal BUC or transceiver connected to a local modem o To a distant end BUC or transceiver through the distant end modem Basic Protocol Whether in EIA 232 or EIA 485 mode all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters suitable for transmission and reception by a Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART The asynchronous character format is 8 N 1 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit The baud rate may vary from 1200 to 57600 baud All data is transmitted in framed packets The Controller is in charge of the process of monitor and control and is the only device that is permitted to initiate at will the transmission of data Targets are only permitted to transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the Controller All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters less than ASCII code 127 In this context the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable All messages from Controller to Target require a response with one exception This will be either to return data that has been requested by the Controller or to acknowledge reception of an instruction t
195. has one line driver Controller and all Targets have line receivers e Target to Controller pair has one line receiver Controller and all Targets have Tri State drivers EIA 232 This is a much simpler configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the Target via a two wire plus ground connection Controller to Target data is carried via EIA 232 electrical levels on one conductor and Target to Controller data is carried in the other direction on the other conductor Rules for Remote Serial Communications with the CRS 300 1 Always wait for a response up to 15 seconds from the CRS 300 before sending the next query or command 2 Ifa time out response is sent from the CRS 300 the user must resend the previous command The response indicates that a pass through command to a modem transceiver attached to the CRS 300 has timed out and there was no response from the other device During this wait do not communicate with the CRS 300 After the response is sent by the CRS 300 it is now ready to receive a message again The CRS 300 knows to wait different times for the different messages it is sending to modems e Status queries no commands are fast typically less than 333 ms e Configuration changes commands take longer and vary by modem type CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 7 5 e Individual commands responses are faster t
196. he position 1 15 of the fault within the Switch FLT string Modem codes are 17 Unit 2 Rx traffic 3 Tx traffic Info codes are 07 Power off 1 Power on 2 Log cleared ddmmyy is the date of the event international format hhmmss is the time of the event If there are no new events the unit replies with RNE If fewer than 5 events remain the last positions are filled with zeroes Command or Query The restore holdoff time is the delay when auto mode prepares to return a modem previously faulted now good back online due to a different Traffic Modem s failure where 01 99 of seconds after offline Traffic Modem lost its fault before it is put back online so that Redundant Modem can bridge the newly faulted modem Query Code and qualifier Response to Command Target to Controller RSH message OK RSH received OK but invalid arguments found RSH message OK message OK but only permitted in Remote mode MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Response to query Target to Controller RNE cr KLMddmmyyhh mmss cr KLMddmmyyhh mmss cr KLMddmmyyhh mmss cr KLMddmmyyhh mmss cr KLMddmmyyhh mmss see Description of Arguments RSH xx see Description of Arguments CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Serial based Remote Product Management Command Code and qualifier Parameter Type Switch Alarm Mask SwitchDataTime Switch Global Configuration Switch ID Arguments for Command or Response
197. ic Modem N ArI efes mA Redundant Modem offline RECOMMENDED CSS s Router port connections Traffic Modem 1 CX uus Network Router me Za ws Traffic Modem N Se Qo mim Redundant Modem offline eu EX m numm 2 Figure A 4 Wired around For Hub to Hub With Standard Traffic Using Routers CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 5 Hub to Hub with Standard Traffic using Switches When connecting two or more hub sites where there are multi paths between each site care must be taken to ensure no network loops occur Figure A 5 depicts two hub sites connected with two or more modems where all the traffic being transmitted and received is on the same LAN VLAN Figure A 6 shows a simplified version of the Networking Loop Since there is no router in the network and all the traffic is destined to the same network routing loops have been created As illustrated two switches have been connected each with two or more separate connections This is not how the Ethernet switches were designed to be used and this configuration will cause a network outage Traffic Modem 1 Network A Switch Sa e Traffic Modem N 1 1 om This will create Network Loop WILL NOT PASS TRAFFIC Traffic Modem 1 0s Network B Switch Traffic Modem N 4 gt Que 3 3 9552 aa
198. iguration is required for successful operation you may need to consult with the router manufacturer CAUTION The wired around redundancy approach is not recommended A 10 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Traffic Modem 1 Ql miam Traffic Modem N CZ uus Redundant Modem offline ERST 3 una Router ths or Switch Traffic Modem THIRK E OR S m E Network Router or Switch ffic M Traffic Modem THIRK 4 mam 10 9 Figure A 11 Wired thru for Point to Multipoint Using Routers Static ARP Entries pepe Traffic Modem 1 Tx Rx 3 CIT us Router lt Traffic Modem N a Redundant Modem offline RECOMMENDED 1 1492 mimm 1 Router port connections change during Backup Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem Tx Rx CES ES Network Router Network P or Switch Traffic Modem G aa Tx Rx Figure A 12 Wired around for Point to Multipoint Using Routers A 11 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 8 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic using Switches Point to Multipoint With switches used the hub and remote are on the same subnet as shown in Figure A 13 meaning that broadcasts will be allowed to transverse the network Learning
199. igure each CnC enabled modem Use the CDM 625 A Front Panel menu to do these steps make sure to press ENTER to save your changes e First from the top level Select menu use the lt P arrow and ENTER keys to navigate each nested menu level until the PMSI control mode display screen appears Select Configuration gt CnC PMSI control Select Configuration Test Monitor Info Store Ld Utility ODU FAST f CONFIG All Mode Tx Rx Clocks D amp I CnC EDMAC Misc Mask Remote IP lt Carrier in Carrier Mode Freq Offset Search Delay PMSI control CnC PMSI mode Redundancy Idle Redundancy Talk Listen 7 e Then from the PMSI mode display screen use the A V arrow keys to select Redundancy and then press ENTER 5 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 n You must repeat this configuration step for every CnC enabled CDM 625 A within the configured redundancy system The Pre Mapped Symbol Interface PMSI is an 485 multi drop bus system where one device transmits and all other devices on the multi drop bus are configured to receive PMSI function as associated with DoubleTalk Carrier in Carrier permits the modulator in a selected unit to provide a direct copy of its output the outbound interferer to one or many other modems The other modem s may then choose to take the PMSI signal and use it for its own CnC reference 5 2 4 2 Configure
200. igured for EDMAC framing Monitor amp Control M amp C information may be communicated to the modems and transceivers at the distant end of the link In order for an M amp C application to be able to communicate with the various devices connected to the Switch the correct addresses must be used This appendix provides details of the address requirements to allow M amp C of the Switch various modems and transceivers that may be included in a CRS 300 1 N Redundancy System CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 C 1 1 C 1 2 Switch Addresses The permitted Switch remote control addresses are limited e For EIA 485 connections the only permitted addresses 1000 3000 5000 and 7000 e For EIA 232 the only permitted address is 0000 The Switch settings for external communications are totally independent from the internal communication between Switch and traffic modems Modem and Transceiver Addresses To monitor and control modems and transceivers at the distant end of the communication link EDMAC must be enabled via the modem front panel in local mode Set the Tx and Rx parameters to establish the link on the modems on each end of the link Then an M amp C application can be used Examples of EIA 232 and EIA 485 addressing schemes are illustrated in the diagrams that follow These diagrams include the following terminology Abbreviation Explanation MCA Monitor amp Control Address to be e
201. ility Ta E eese nenne nennen nnne tennis nnne neta nans 1 6 Table 3 1 485 Pass Through User Data Connector esses enne 3 4 Table 3 2 Remote Control ConnectoOr rte cr e eet testen eco eo aea e eee doe bees tue ade anaes 3 5 Table 3 3 System Alarms CONNECT oseti ioeie isian eede 3 6 Table 3 4 EIA 232 422 V 35 3 7 Table 3 5 EIA 232 422 V 35 LVDS 3 8 Fable 3 6 5ASI Contectors fttt te hte bet e AE e e d eR adu 3 9 Table 3 7 8 kHz IDR ESC Corinector cesses desea ere 3 9 Table 3 8 Balanced G 703 Connector amp 4 nennen nennen renes neta sanas sss seta 3 10 Table 3 9 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors sensns naga nn nis 3 11 Table 3 10 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors esses eene 3 11 Table 3 11 HSSlI Connector tr ee tetti c t ttam ee e 3 12 Table 3 12 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connector PinOUts ccccccccsscccsseceesseceeseeceseeecsseeeeseeeseees 3 13 Table 3 13 Quad E1 Connector Pinouts Typical Ports 1 through 4 3 14 Table 3 14 Quad E1 Connector Pair PinOUts
202. illustrates cabling connectors on the basis of available data or traffic interface type 3 21 CRS 230 Controller Connectors 2 1 CRS 230 System Controller E ai T Chapter Feature Connector Description Sect 485 Pass Through IF Switch Control 1 IF Switch Control 3 2 1 1 E 2 485 Pass Through 3242 Remote Control System Alarms CRS 230 3 Remote Control 32 13 4 System Alarms 3 2 14 3 2 1 1 IF Switch Control Connector DB 25M p _ Use the DB 25M IF Switch Control connector on the CRS 23 0 for umm direct connection to the corresponding cabling connector on the IF Switch Control CRS 280 or CRS 350 switches when used This connector supplies azz Y power to these switches provides the logic interface to drive the active modem and decides whether the system is in bridged or backup mode The CRS 280 350 performs the same bridging and backing up functions of the Tx and Rx IF signals identically to how the CRS 300 processes the terrestrial data signals 3 2 1 2 485 Pass Through Connector DB 9F Use the DB 9F 485 Pass Through connector on the CRS 230 only with CDM Qx QxL modems It is provided for 2 Wire EIA 485 serial remote 485 Pass Through monitor and control of the modems Table 3 1 485 Pass Through User Data Connector Pin Signal Function Direction 5 Ground 9 EIA 485 Transmit Data A Out 4 Reserved do not connect to this pin 8 E
203. ing IF 4 14 4 4 CDM 625 A Modem Connections scecccccsssssssescececcccccassescecececeecansseseececeseecansseseeeseeees 4 18 4 4 1 RMI TMI Limitations and 4 18 4 4 2 CnC Data Connections eee 4 19 4 4 3 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modem 4 21 4 4 3 1 Control Cabling Requirement Regardless of Driving Traffic Data 4 21 4 4 3 2 G 703 Balanced Unbalanced Data 4 22 4 4 3 3 G 703 Quad E1 Data 4 23 4 4 3 4 ASI Data ConnecLiorns einer evt e Pre de cav eR evt da Pv Ead 4 24 4 4 3 5 EIA 422 Data Connections re recte terere e rad eed ree Payer ev Te Ree de daa 4 25 4 4 3 6 HSSI Datar Connections isa era cese re aire e eeu 4 26 4 4 3 7 LVDS Data Connections diese based treo tee a Y PRESE dud 4 26 4 4 3 8 Ethernet Data Connections cin er ceci e re E ra e Ee ae Cea T 4 26 4 4 3 8 1 Ethernet Data Connection Wired thru Method No 506 4 27 4 4 3 8
204. itch Control 2 System Controller gt ER AS 0377 ro olf Remote Control System Alarms CRS 230 DB 9 Male DB 25 Female 1 3 3 2 Power Supply Card Assemblies ON Wot operation use T1A fuses en use T0 5A fuses B a Power d lt 48 VOLTS DC 50 watts 2A max 20 Unit contains internal electronic resettable fuse e CRS 250 D DC Power Supply Module Figure 1 6 CRS 240 AC Power Supply AS 0376 50 60 100 240 V Figure 1 7 CRS 250 DC Power Supply PL 10458 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 3 3 3 Modem Interface Cards 1 3 3 3 1 CDM 625 A CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL CDM 600 L Interface Cards The following tables indicate which TMI Traffic Modem Interface cards and which RMI Redundant Modem Interface cards should be used with each modem and data type CDM 625 A Modem Data Type TMI Type RMI Type EIA 422 V 35 10 100 Ethernet Note4 dog iudi ASI Notes 5 6 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI Nete2 CRS 325 Notes 5 6 G 703 Unbal Note 2 G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI Note 2 CRS 330 G 703 Unbal DDI IDO DDO IDI Nete2 CRS 310 HSSI 10 100 Ethernet Note4 es EIA 422 V 35 LVDS G 703 Bal DDI IDO DDO IDI Nete2 CRS 340 Note 3 G 703 Unbal Notes 1 2 Quad E1 CDS 365D Notes 5 6 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Modems Data Type TMI Type RMI Type G
205. ive Ethernet Port turned on while the Offline Modem s active Ethernet Port is turned off The traffic IP Address is only accessible on the Online Modem Furthermore the parameter backup mechanism is unsupported in Ethernet Bridge Mode You must therefore make sure that all parameters match in the Online and Offline modems See Chapter 5 FRONT PANEL OPERATION in the SLM 5650 or SLM 5650A Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information about using the modem front panel menus 5 2 4 3 3 Configure Ethernet Bridge Mode via Optional GbE Interface The Switch supports Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode only due to backplane limitations Ethernet Bridge Mode redundancy when using SLM 5650 5650 modems equipped with the optional 10 100 1000 Base T GbE Interface is provided by a Single IP Address scheme You must configure the SLM 5650 5650A for Ethernet Bridge Mode redundancy Typical for each modem use the SLM 5650 5650A Front Panel menu to enter a unique IP Address for the optional 10 100 1000 Base T GbE Interface card that is on the same subnet Make sure to press ENT to save your changes Select CONFIG gt Mode gt Interface gt Gigabit Ethernet CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 See Chapter 5 FRONT PANEL OPERATION in the SLM 5650 or SLM 5650A Installation Q and Operation Manual for detailed information about using the modem front panel menus 5 2 4
206. lots in the CDM 710 allow for many possible interface card combinations The Switch can cover many of these combinations but not all capability is limited by the Switch s backplane configuration For example if you configure the Switch backplane to handle one HSSI interflow then this limits the supported Redundant and Traffic modems to one HSSI interface per unit as well Table 4 3 details the CDM 710 interface card combinations that are compatible with the Switch Table 4 3 CDM 710 Interface Card Combinations CDM 710 Modem Configuration 1 N CRS 300 Configuration Interface Slot 1 Interface Slot 2 TMI Card RMI Card ASI CDI 40 LEE HN CRS 325 CRS 306 Can be used as ASI CDI 40 GbE CDI 70 Red ndant Modein HSSI CDI 60 GbE CDI 70 eee CRS 306 Can be used as HSSI CDI 60 GbE CDI 70 mm Redundant Modem Notes 1 The Redundant Modem must have the same interface cards in each slot as any of the Traffic Modems 2 The Traffic Modem must have either the same interface cards in each slot as any of the other Traffic Modems have or a blank panel installed 3 Interface Slots 1 and 2 are not active simultaneously 4 68 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 9 3 4 9 4 4 9 5 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems The Control Cable CA WR12361 1 provides the serial communication path between the Switch and the modems and controls the modem s external Tx IF m
207. low blow fuses one each for line and neutral connections The fuses are contained within a fuse holder that is press fit into the body of the IEC power module Figure 3 7 Er E Figure 3 7 Replace the AC Fuses Do these steps to replace the module fuse s Figure 3 7 typical for each module WARNING DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY BEFORE PROCEEDING e First unseat the fuse holder from the IEC power module o Use the slot to pry the holder outward from the IEC power module CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 o Pull the holder straight out and then swing the holder away from the module e Then remove and replace the fuses as needed CAUTION FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING e Finally reseat the fuse holder in the IEC power module 3 3 2 2 48 Direct Current DC Power Interface Feature Description o 00 Power Cord Connector Press Fit Fuse Holder NOT USED DC Power Specifications 50 watts 2 Amps maximum 48 volts DC 20 nominal 38 60 volts Corcom PS series Corcom GA210 or Molex 03 12 1026 While this interface features a fuse holder that is press fit into the body of the IEC power module the CRS 300 chassis features an internal electronic resettable fuse Figure 3 8 Chassis DC Power Interface CRS 250 DC Power Supply Module 3 3 2 2 1 48V DC Operation Power Application
208. me but are shown together here to indicate their relative positions on the screen 6 2 4 SELECT MONITOR MONITOR STATUS SW ALARM STORED EVENTS COMMS IO Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT 6 2 4 1 MONITOR STATUS TM 02 IS BRIDGED BY RM BACKUP HOLDOFF 05 SEC This display shows the bridged or backup status of the Switch e When the Redundant Modem is not backing up any of the Traffic Modems the display will show which Traffic Modem is currently being bridged by the Redundant Modem e If AUTO mode is on it will also show the backup holdoff time that is employed should the bridged Traffic Modem fail e f AUTO mode is off the second line displays OFF e When the Switch has taken the bridged Traffic Modem offline and replaced it with the Redundant Modem whether done manually or automatically the display changes as follows TM 02 IS BRIDGED BY RM RESTORE HOLDOFF 05 SEC The RESTORE HOLDOFF time is shown on the second line if AUTO mode is on CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 4 2 MONITOR SW ALARM The following are examples of possible Switch status displays along with suggestions to assist you in diagnosing the reason for the fault SWITCH ALARM NONE There are no faults The Unit Status front panel LED should be GREEN SWITCH ALARM 12V PS B NIS UNDERVOLTAGE There is a fault Power supply B is under vol
209. mpatible with the TMI being used The CDM 600 Ls and CDM 625 As have both TX and RX interface types CDM 570 As and CDM 570L ALs have only one unit interface type each Either edit the modem interface setting s or swap the TMI CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 4 5 MONITOR STORED EVENTS STORED EVENTS VIEW CLEAR ALL PRESS ENTER Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select VIEW or CLEAR ALL and then press ENT 6 2 4 3 1 MONITOR STORED EVENTS VIEW LOG23 26 01 14 10 37 32 FT 06 RX ALARM UP DN Use the A V arrow keys to scroll backwards or forwards through the entries in the event log Press ENT or CLR to return to the previous menu When a fault condition indicated in the above example as FT occurs it is time stamped and put into the log The event log can store up to 98 events Note that the date is shown in DD MM YY format in accordance with international convention Likewise when the fault condition clears FT changes to OK this is also recorded as per this example LOG25 26 01 14 10 37 45 OK 06 RX ALARM UP DN Next to the FT OK indicator is a number code for the faulted unit the TM slot number 1 through 10 RM for Redundant Modem or SW for the Switch 6 2 4 3 2 MONITOR STORED EVENTS gt CLEAR ALL When you select CLEAR ALL the Switch clears the event log returns you to the previous menu However if there are faults present on the unit at this time
210. ms LINK TQGETHER OVERALL RE IN SHELL GND 1 1 GND TX 232 2 3 RX 232 RX 232 3 2 TX 232 NC 4 4 NC GND 2 gt GND Rx B 6 B nc Rx A Tx_A Tx_B a 6 Rx B _ 9 y 7 Rx A 9 PIN TYPE D 9 PIN TYPE D MALE MALE b v a Figure B 9 CDM Qx QxL EIA 485 Null Modem Cable CA WR11419 1 B 11 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 7 Modem to Modem Optional EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable for CDM Qx QxL 15X DB 9F You may use this optional Type D 9 pin female Multi Drop ribbon cable to daisy chain CDM Qx QxL Modems for communications when Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC is not a concern You must use the standard CA WR11417 1 EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable Figure B 7 when Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC is a concern 126 g a tt cC of m m Tm C onm 15X 9 PIN TYPE FEMALE J1 Figure B 10 CDM Qx QxL Optional EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable CA RB11423 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 3 8 Switch to Modem Y Control Cable for CDM Qx QxL with CnC HD 15M 2X DB 15F This cable is one of the two types of control cables required for CDM Qx QxL Modems This cable
211. mtech EF Data Corporation s products the aforementioned warranty and shall indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser lessee or user based upon allegations that the buyer its agents or employees have made additional warranties or representations as to product preference or use The remedies provided herein are the buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory xxiii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Preface Revision 19 Notes xxiv Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION 1 4 Overview This chapter provides the description and specifications for the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch and its optional IF and ESC Switch components CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch OPTIONAL CRS 280 IF Switch 70 140MHz OPTIONAL 32 T CRS 280L IF Switch L Band OPERA 93335 DD OPTIONAL CRS 350 Engineering Service Channel ESC Switch The CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch referred to throughout this manual as the Switch provides fully automatic protection of traffic circuits in the case of equipment failure You can configure the CRS 300 to back up replace a Traffic modem when a Unit Fault and or a Tx Rx Traffic Fault occurs 1 1
212. n The offline modem is automatically configured to match the on line modem M amp C can only be achieved to the online modem Note It is not possible for the offline modem of a 1 1 pair to respond to EDMAC messages directly as it is not transmitting Using the internal 1 1 link the online modem polls and retains the off line modem status Depending on the modem this information can be obtained as follows 1 For CDM 625 A CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL and CDM 600 L modems Use OUS Offline Unit Status OUS for queries This command query is available in the following modems firmware versions Modem FW Version CDM 625A 1 1 1 or later CDM 625 1 1 1 or later Modem FWVesin CDM 570 1 4 1 or later CDM 570L 1 3 1 or later CDM 600 1 6 1 or later CDM 570A 1 1 1 or later CDM 600L 1 3 0 or later CDM 570AL 1 1 1 or later CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C Revision 19 2 For CDM Qx QxL modems Use FLT Faults and Status FLT for queries This command query is available in available in firmware versions 1 6 2 or later Note 1 1 internal redundancy in EDMAC Slave mode is available only in firmware version 1 6 2 or later See the appropriate modem s Installation and Operation Manual for additional information C 3 Transceiver Setup Configure the modems first for EDMAC operation setting up the Remote Control Address RCA for local units and ESA EDMAC addresses for EDMAC mo
213. ncorporates the following key reliability features e Dual independent AC or DC power supplies e Traffic Modems with differing data types can all be supported by the Redundant Modem the exception to this is the CDM Qx QxL and with some limitations the CDM 625 A e Primary traffic paths are maintained error free when power is removed e TMIs can be completely removed from the CRS 300 with cables still attached and traffic is not interrupted or affected e RMI and or TMIs can be replaced without disturbing other traffic circuits Interfaces The CRS 300 supports all of the modems available interface types This includes EIA 530 422 V 35 Sync EIA 232 ASI Balanced or Unbalanced G 703 LVDS Single port Ethernet Bridge Mode and HSSI Ease of Connection The modular design of the Switch simplifies cabling connections between the Switch and the Redundant and Traffic Modems thereby reducing the number of potential failure points within the rack enclosure installation e When you use the CDM 625 A CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL or CDM 600 L modems The multi protocol interface requires only a single cable for each modem This cable carries all data signals alarm information and the serial remote control interface CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 If you use the G 703 interfaces you will need only one additional cable for each modem e When you use the CDM Qx QxL modems You will
214. nd 3 only 4 48 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 IS connected to CRS 350 RMI P Overesd Osta s p amp n a 2 24 E E Tm _ J8 Alarma A 21 Remete GF Ove Corp tinernet CRS 350 ESC Switch Rear Panel a Treme E gt m Te we pum 4 ji it i i ji I Hi et P iy T in ig i Hd f i e wee wom D a em CMS a P tanse in me UBA y wc CA WR0066 nusa C y Coh EF Ome Comp a SLM 5650 5650A connected to CRS 350 TMI 1 Pi Osa ex umane NR Figure 4 19 Cabling Example for CRS 350 to SLM 5650 5650A Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only 4 49 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 4 50 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 7 CDM Qx QxL Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations EIA 485 Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Control Y Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e User Data Connections CRS 300 to User CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connecti
215. nector behind the small plastic flap 5 20 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 6 Update the CRS 300 Switch Firmware Make sure to operate the CRS 300 and all installed modems with the latest available firmware The CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch is factory shipped with its latest version of operating firmware If you need to update the Switch firmware you may download the update from the Comtech EF Data Web site www comtechefdata com You may also receive the firmware update archive file via e mail from Comtech EF Data Product Support You may perform the firmware update without opening the CRS 300 by directly connecting a user supplied Microsoft Windows based PC to the Remote Control connector located on the CRS 230 System Controller Card Do these steps e Download the firmware update archive file via the Internet to the User PC e Once the firmware update is extracted from the transferred archive file execute the update process via use of the supplied CCCFlash EXE Utility Application 5 6 1 1 About Firmware Files Naming Versions and Archive Formats Comtech EF Data s Web site catalogues its firmware update files by product type e g modem converter switch etc and specific model optional configurations Comtech EF Data provides modem specific firmware updates for the CRS 300 as follows Web Hyperlink EXE ZIP Filename
216. need to connect an additional EIA 485 multi drop cable from the Switch to all modems This cable enables remote control interface capability e For EIA 232 EIA 485 M amp C User connections A direct user to modem serial EIA 232 485 communication connection is not permissible when connected to the Switch You must instead connect to the DB 9 Remote connector on the CRS 230 System Controller that is installed on the Switch Appendix ADDRESSING SCHEME INFORMATION TMI Monitoring Terrestrial user clock and data signals to and from a Traffic Modem are routed through a TMI via a set of relays This is arranged so that the de energized unpowered state connects the data signals directly through to the Traffic Modem If the power supplies to the system are lost or if a traffic carrying TMI is removed no interruption of the traffic occurs It should also be noted that in normal circumstances where the Redundant Modem is not in service no data is carried through the CRS 300 backplane all data is routed via the TMI CRS 280 280L Option Figure 1 2 in Sect 1 1 2 shows an operational schematic for the optional CRS 280 280L interface e The CRS 280 70 140 MHz Switch is necessary when one or more modems within the redundancy system connect to more than one up down converter This occurs when the modems connect to more than one transponder on the same antenna polarization or when modem redundancy needs to span two or more polariza
217. ng parameters of the Switch that pertain to enabling OPTIONS 6 2 23 or disabling the availability of Traffic Modems the reporting of faults and time delays for responding to faults REMOTE 6 2 24 Permits you to define the remote control settings ACTIVE 6 2 2 5 Permits you to activate modems if a TMI is present The Switch may be monitored over the remote control bus at any time When in Local mode however configuration parameters may only be changed through the 6 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 front panel Conversely when in Remote mode the unit may be monitored from the front panel but configuration parameters may only be changed via the remote control bus 6 2 2 1 CONFIG MANUAL MANUAL SELECT BRIDGE 02 BACKUP 02 You may manually select which Traffic Modem is to be bridged or backed up In MANUAL mode Auto is OFF both of these selections are available Use the lt gt arrow keys to first select between BRIDGE or BACKUP Then use the A V arrow keys to scroll through all active Traffic Modems the menu skips over any inactive modem slots Press ENT to continue In AUTO mode the Switch has control and will automatically backup any active Traffic Modem based on its fault relay activity The BACKUP selection is unavailable for manual selection but the modem being bridged may be changed In this mode the MANUAL SELECT display appears as follows MANUAL SELECT
218. nication connections must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This information is detailed in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems 4 10 1 RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations n 1 Traffic modems with differing data types can all be supported by the Redundant Modem 2 Depending on the traffic data type the appropriate jumper settings are provided on the Switch TMI to ensure proper operation for HSSI with CA TA signals using the Switch CRS 336 TMI See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information 4 10 2 Interface Combinations The two plug in interface module slots available in the CDM 700 allow for many possible ijnterface card combinations The Switch can cover many but not all of these combinations Table 4 4 details the CDM 700 interface card combinations that are compatible with the Switch Table 4 4 CDM 700 Interface Card Combinations CDM 700 Modem Configuration 1 N CRS 300 Configuration Comments Interface Slot 1 Interface Slot 2 TMI Card RMI Card G 703 CDI 10 CRS 345 CRS 306 fa G 703 CDI 10 HSSI CDI 60 Not Supported Not Supported Exceeds backplane capability Use wired around GigE GbE CDI 70 CRS 345 CRS 306 see APPENDIX A OC3 Copper CDI 50 CRS 325 CRS 306 GbE CDI 70 Valid for Redundant modem HSSI CDI 60 Exceeds backplane capability ae M a see APPENDIX vio CRS 306 Use wired around Gig
219. nnect the Switch CRS 345 TMI Type D 9 pin female connector to the Traffic CDM 700 G 703 Interface module BNC ports Certain modem configurations require a modified version of this cable that use only four of the eight BNC connectors See Chapter 4 10 CDM 700 Modem Connections for examples of this alternate use 8 PIN TYPE FEMALE 1 Rx FO SLOT 7 Tie Du F JT be I5 E t Figure B 30 CDM 700 G 703 Data Cable CA RF12278 1 B 35 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 4 19 Switch to Modem G 703 Data Cable for CDM 700 DB 15F 8X BNC 750 Male You may use this cable to connect the Switch CRS 306 RMI Type D 15 pin female connector to the Redundant CDM 700 G 703 Interface module BNC ports Certain modem configurations require a modified version of this cable that use only four of the eight BNC connectors See Chapter 4 10 CDM 700 Modem Connections for illustrations of this alternate use 15 PIN 1 TYPE D LABELS FOR BNC ENDS __ 8 FEMALE 08 15 LABEL TEXT PAIRS TYPE BNC PORT R PORT T Rx t gt t JI e SLU 4 12 Rx PORT 2 SLOT 2 p an uc VT nr 1 1 5 Tx t E OL Figure B 31 CDM 700 6 703 Data Cable CA RF12279 1 B 36 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 B 4 20 Switch to Modem Audio Data Cable for CDM 600 L DB 9M
220. nns 6 19 6 2 4 3 2 MONITOR STORED EVENTS CLEAR ALL eren nnne nnns 6 19 6 2 4 4 MONITOR COMMS Communications State 6 19 6 245 MONITOR OUS a ettet rettet en t t ee C eds 6 20 6 2 5 SELECT STORE LD Store or Load Configuration ccccccsssccesssceessecesseecsseeecsseeeeseecesseeenas 6 20 viii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 62 5 1 STORE ELD STORE deett atate edt ere er tee edi ee Pa wees 6 20 6 2 5 2 STORE LD eaea Pa ia ea aaia aeea 6 21 6 2 65 SELECT UTILITY ui 6 21 6 2 6 1 UTILITY SET RTC Set Real Time Clock 6 21 6 2 6 2 UTILITY DISPLAY Display Brightness 6 21 6 2 6 3 2 UTILITY SWITCHEID a Cia ha dali dain ads 6 22 6 26 4 UTIEITYS TEST eoe nr one Hare comen Rare CUP on euer ee Uere a ranas 6 22 6 2 6 5 UTILITY RELAY i de ense ottenere po conte tree ee ence eoe COR ro 6 22 CHAPTER 7 SERIAL BASED REMOTE PRODUCT 7 1 7 1 lou 7 1 7 2 ap 7 1 7 3 d cri M 7 2 7 4 Rules for Remote Serial Communications with the 5 300
221. nt 2 RMI O timeout 3 RM not in remote mode 4 in a test mode 5 RM is rejecting MGC configuration string 6 CDM Qx Interface is set for IP No Coms available 7 CDM 700 RM is rejecting an interface configuration string Power supply information values 0 or 1 only Ala 5V PSU A under over B b 5V PSU B under over 12V PSU A under over D d 12V PSU B under over Ele 12V PSU A under over F f 12V PSU B under over m is TMI interface mismatch 0 no problem 1 9 A for pos 10 indicates the position of a TMI interface mismatch 115 modem communications 0 no problem 1 9 A for pos 10 indicates the position of a modem which has been activated but is not responding Local Remote 1 byte value of 0 Command or Query LRS message OK LRS x Status or 1 Where x indicates the local remote status of the Switch LRS received OK but see Description of 0 local invalid arguments found Arguments 1 remote Modem Alarm 1 byte numerical Command or Query MAM message OK MAM x Mask Where x indicates the Modem alarm mask MAM received OK but see Description of 0 no faults masked invalid arguments found Arguments 1 Tx faults masked MAM message OK but 2 Rx faults masked only permitted in Remote 3 Both Tx and Rx faults masked mode Query Code and qualifier Response to Command Target to Controller Response to query Target to Controller 7 11 MN CRS300 IOM
222. nted behind a sealed membrane overlay The keys have a positive click action for tactile feedback The keypad has an auto repeat feature If a key is held down for more than 1 second the key action repeats automatically at the rate of 15 keystrokes per second This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields These six switches function as follows Switch Rmdm S 4 UP ARROW Use this key to edit the value at the current cursor position when appropriate It also increments the value of a numeric field Use this key to edit the value at the current cursor position when appropriate DOWNARROW Decrements the value of a numeric field 9 RIGHT ARROW Use this key to move the displayed cursor to the right TE memet Use this key to accept an edited entry Most menus prompt you to press this key Sem ENTER by displaying the messages PRESS ENTER ENTER or ENT al amp Press ENT to accept the entry and display the previous menu Use this key to exit the current operation and display the previous menu without CLEAR accepting any configuration changes EINEN Press CLR to reject the entry and return to the previous menu 6 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 1 3 Front Panel Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD The Front Panel Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD is an active display showing two lines of 24 characters each
223. ntered as the address of a unit into an M amp C application e g SatMac Modem addresses are automatically assigned by the TMI RMI slot positions to which they are associated within a Switch When using 485 multi drop you may change the Switch bus address to 1000 3000 5000 7000 or 9000 7000 is shown in the figures in this appendix as an example only RCA Remote Control Address to be configured via the unit front panel CONFIG REMOTE ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range Local modem is configured as EDMAC master Distant end modem is an EDMAC slave CDM 625 A CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL and CDM 600 L modems employ a point to point internal serial communication bus within the DB 25 or DB 9 cable to the Switch Figure C 1 shows the external EIA 232 addressing scheme for these modems Figure C 2 depicts the external EIA 485 connection for this configuration SLM 5650 5650A and CDM 7XX modems employ a point to point internal serial communications bus within the HD 15 cable to the Switch Figure C 3 shows the external EIA 232 addressing scheme for these modems Figure C 4 depicts the external 485 connection for this configuration CDM Qx QxL modems require an external multi drop EIA 485 connection Figure C 5 shows the external EIA 232 addressing scheme for a system comprising these modems with a Switch Figure C 6 depicts the external EIA 485 connection for this configuration See Figure C 7 for a distant end CRS 300 Qx QxL setu
224. nu SELECT UTILITY gt Em gt Emulation Mode Use the V A keys on the keypad to select the appropriate emulation mode The choices from this display are e Normal CDM 625 or CDM 625A e Emulate CDM 600 e Emulate CDM 600L Once you select the desired emulation mode press the ENT key to save the configuration 4 4 6 2 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems in CDM 600 L Emulation Mode For each CDM 625 A that replaces a CDM 600 L modem See Figure 4 14 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO66 Control Data Cable cables between each CDM 625 A and the Switch DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled Data Interface on the CDM 625 A See Sect 4 4 3 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems for the system configuration and cable interconnection details for the various traffic data types that are available in this operational mode CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CA 0000074 CDM 625 connected to CRS 350 TMI 1 s dt T 2 Figure 4 13 Cabling Example for CRS 350 to CDM 625 A Connections shown for RMI and TMI 1 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 625 connected to CRS 310 RMI a CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 370 TMI 7 T CDM 600 600L connected to CRS 340 5 CA WRO0066 LXI co J
225. o change the configuration of the Target The exception to this is when the Controller broadcasts a message such as Set Time Date using Address 0 when the Target is set to EIA 485 mode 7 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 7 5 1 Packet Structure The exchange of information is transmitted Controller to Target and Target to Controller in packets Each packet contains a finite number of bytes consisting of printable ASCII characters excluding ASCII code 127 DELETE In this context the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable With one exception all messages from Controller to Target require a response this will be either to return data that has been requested by the Controller or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to change the configuration of the Target Controller to Target Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter Instruction Code Code Qualifier Optional Arguments End of Packet or Carriage Return ASCII ios 60 ASCII et 4T ASCII codes 61 or 63 ASCII code 13 1 character 4 characters 1 character 3 characters 1 character n characters 1 character Example 0000 RSH 30 CR Target to Controller Start of Packet Target Address Address Delimiter Instruction Code Code Qualifier Optional Arguments End of Packet or Carriage Return Line ASCII a 62 ASCII z 47 ASCII codes Feed 61 63 33 or 42 ASCII
226. onnector labeled J2 on the Switch RMI or J3 on the Switch TMI s to CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 7 5 e HSSI connector labeled HSSI on the demodulator If Quad E1 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 25 and do these steps to first connect and secure the Quad E1 RMI Data Cable CA WR13018 e DB 15M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI to e AX RJ 48 connectors labeled Port 1 through Port 4 on the Redundant CDM Qx QxL Next do these steps to connect and secure the 4X Quad E1 TMI Data Cables CEFD P N PP CATSFF7FTGY e RJ 48 connectors labeled Port 1 through 4 on the Switch TMI s to e RJ 48 connectors labeled Port 1 through Port 4 on the Traffic CDM Qx QxL User Data Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic Modem s Data Interface connectors Because the Redundant Modem s function is to replace a faulted traffic modem the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the CDM Qx QxL modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM Qx QxL connected to CRS 305 RMI
227. onnector pair for Quad E1 operation 41 22 2X RJ 48F 01 LABELED Port 1 or 3 02 LABELED Port 2 or 4 Port 1 or 3 Tx In Port 1 or3 Rx In Port 1 or3 Rx In Port 2 or 4 Tx In Port 2 of 4 Tx In Port 2 or 4 Rx In Port 2 or 4 Rx In GND Figure B 24 CDM 625 A Quad E1 Data Adapter Cable CA 0000164 B 29 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix B Revision 19 4 13 Modem to Switch CDM 625 A to CRS 350 Overhead Data Cable DB 44M DB 9M gt DB 9F DB 25M DB 15F You may use this multi purpose cable to connect the CDM 625 A Modem to the CRS 350 ESC Switch 5 WIRE LIST 1 Ss FROM TO COMMENTS 2o Pit 33 1 pii J3 88 il TWISTED PAIR 150 7 TWISTED PAIR 1 16 J 3 1 ry A N 510 co TWISTED PAIR ET P1 9 23 5 MALE P130 Se TWISTED PAIR Pt4 Je1 1 34 35 2 1 3 353 1 33 25 4 1 2 35 5 1 32 35 6 1 1 J5 7 P4 P131 35 8 P120 459 P1 28 25 10 1 19 35 11 1 15 25 12 1 18 25 13 1 42 J5 14 1 17 J5 15 P1 24 P4 1 us Fe TWISTED PAIR I br38 pasg TWISTED PAIR P1 13 Pas Pia3 P419 TWISTED PAIR 1 1 37 4 7 1 14 4 9 J5 P 1 29 Petr WISTEDPAR P1 7 P4 11 P1 22 P4 24 TWISTED PAIR 1 27 P4 12 piz pais TWIS
228. ons Revision 19 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 CDM Qx QxL Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling power up sequence and COMs connections must be correct to avoid contention in the system from the modem Tx carrier This information is detailed in Sect 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems As shown in Figure 4 22 through Figure 4 25 the CA WR12069 1 Control Y Cable provides fault information from the modem and IF Mute to the modem You must always use this cable RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations Because the CDM Qx QxL redundant modem can only support one type of data interface the Switch TMIs cannot be mixed within the same Switch The Switch TMls feature jumpers that are pre set to ensure proper operation with the following traffic data e For EIA 422 with RTS CTS DTR DSR signals using the CRS 316 e For HSSI with CA TA signals using the CRS 336 See Chapter 5 MODEM TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION for this important configuration information EIA 485 Connections CRS 300 to Modems An EIA 485 Multi drop cable provides the communication path between the Switch and the modems There are two types of EIA 485 Multi drop cable available a standard CA WR11417 1 shielded cable to guard against EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility concerns or an optional CA RB11423 1 ribbon cable Both are available from Comtech EF Data Se
229. ons of Conformity for the applicable directives standards and practices that follow European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC e Emissions EN 55022 Class A Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment e Immunity EN 55024 Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics Limits and Methods of Measurement e 61000 3 2 Harmonic Currents Emission e EN 61000 3 3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker e Federal Communications Commission Federal Code of Regulation FCC Part 15 Subpart B CAUTION TO ENSURE THAT THE UNIT COMPLIES WITH THESE STANDARDS OBEY THESE INSTRUCTIONS e Use coaxial cable that is of good quality for connections to the L Band Type N Rx receive female connector e Use Type D connectors that have back shells with continuous metallic shielding Type D cabling must have a continuous outer shield either foil or braid or both The shield must be bonded to the back shell e Operate the unit with its cover on at all times XX CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Preface Revision 19 European Union Low Voltage Directive LVD 2006 95 EC HAR Type of power cord required for use in the European Community N CAUTION Double pole Neutral Fusing ACHTUNG Zweipolige bzw Neutralleiter Sicherung International Symbols Sb Pm
230. or o J1ofthe Control Y Cable goes to the modulator Alarm connector o J2 of the Control Y Cable goes to the demodulator Alarm connector Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems Do these steps to connect and secure the cables between each CDM Qx QxL and the Switch If EIA 530 V 35 EIA 232 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 21 and do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 e DB 25M connector labeled P2 on the Switch RMI or P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled EIA 530 on the CDM Qx QxL demodulator If Balanced G 703 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 22 and do these steps to connect and secure the Data Cable CA WR9038 6 e DB 15M connector labeled P1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15F connector labeled G 703 on the CDM Qx QxL demodulator If Unbalanced G 703 is the traffic data type see Figure 4 23 and do these steps to first connect and secure the 750 BNC Tx Cable CA WRO0813 8 e BNCconnector labeled JA on the Switch RMI or 13 on the Switch TMI s to e BNC connector labeled Tx on the demodulator Next do these steps to connect and secure the BNC Rx Cable CA WRO0813 8 e connector labeled J3 on the Switch RMI or J5 on the Switch TMI s to e BNCconnector labeled Rx on the demodulator If HSSI is the traffic data type see Figure 4 24 and do these steps to connect and secure the HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 e HSSI c
231. ormation When you use the SLM 5650 5650A with the Switch the modem is NOT compatible for use in a Vipersat network Modems using a single port i e Port 1 of the 4 Port Network Processor Module can NOT be mixed with modems using EIA 530 or HSSI data interfaces or the G 703 or single port Gigabit Ethernet card options 4 6 2 Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems The Control Cable CA WR12136 1 provides the serial communication path between the Switch and the modems and controls the modem s external Tx IF mute control line You must always use this cable To provide user access to the AGC and I amp Q outputs of the modem the CA WR12842 6 Control Y Cable sold separately is available for use in place of the CA WR12136 1 cable See Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS for detailed information about these optional cable assemblies See Figure 4 16 through Figure 4 18 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WR12136 1 cable or the CA WR12482 6 Control Y Cable if used between the Switch and each SLM 5650 5650A 4 42 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e HD 15F connector labeled J9 Auxiliary on the SLM 5650 5650A 4 6 3 Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems Referring to Figure 4 16 If HSSI is the traffic data type do these steps to connect and secure the HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 between the
232. our Switch RMI TMI cards as instructed in this chapter in Sect 5 3 RMI Card Configuration Reference and Sect 5 4 TMI Card Configuration Reference Finally once you properly configure the modems and Switch RMI TMI cards for 1 N redundant operation you should then set the Switch for proper operation using the CRS 300 Front Panel as instructed in this chapter in Sect 5 5 Configure the CRS 300 Switch 5 1 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Configure Your Modems Connect Your Modem Power Connect the power cords of each modem to a power supply and turn all modems ON Modem Firmware and Hardware Requirements All Traffic Modems and the Redundant Modem must be of the same model in order for the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch to operate correctly You must also configure the Redundant Modem with the same firmware version and installed options as the Traffic Modems so that it can properly mimic all installed Traffic Modems in the event of switchover Permitted modem models and firmware versions are Modem Modem Firmware Version GigE Firmware Version CDM 625 1 1 1 or later CDM 625A 1 1 1 or later CDM 570 1 4 1 or later CDM 570A 1 1 1 or later CDM 570L 1 3 1 or later CDM 570AL 1 1 1 or later N A CDM Qx QxL 1 1 4 or later N A CDM 710G 710GL 5 1 1 or later 1 1 9 CDM 710 4 1 1 or l
233. ow key to de activate that modem 2 Power down the modem 3 Detach all cables Do these steps to replace a faulted Traffic Modem that is being backed up by the Redundant Modem 1 Detach the IF cables of the faulted modem 2 Power down the modem 3 Remove all other the cables and remove the modem 4 Install the replacement modem 5 Attach the power cord and power up the modem 6 Attach control data and IF cables as directed in Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS 7 Configure the modem as directed in Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION 8 The new Traffic Modem should lock as it is bridging the Redundant Modem The Switch will then ready and able to manage any subsequent faults 9 If desired you can go to MANUAL mode switch the active traffic over from the Redundant Modem to the Traffic Modem and then return to AUTO mode CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 3 SELECT INFO Information INFO S N ID SETUP IF SWITCH REMCONT MASK The INFO selections are read only information screens the purpose being to provide you with the current Switch configuration information without risking inadvertent alterations Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select from the choices shown and then press ENT Typical for all nested screens Press ENT or CLR to return to the previous menu 6 2 3 1 INFO S N SWITCH S N 1234567890 This screen displays the unique
234. p using Traffic modems in EDMAC Slave Mode CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix C External RS 232 Serial connection Revision 19 LOCAL END Hub DISTANT END Remotes ee 1 MCA 0101 CSAT amp 1 0114 Modem 1 RCA 0 CSAT 2 MCA 0102 CSAT 2 0115 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0111 MCA 0100 EDMAC master Modem 2 EDMAC slave ESA 0110 Modem 2 RCA 0 MCA 0200 EDMAC master ESA 0210 RCA 0 MCA 0300 EDMAC master ESA 0310 CSAT 1 0201 CSAT 2 0202 CSAT 1 CSAT 2 MCA 0214 MCA 0215 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0211 Modem 2 slave CSAT 1 0314 CSAT 2 0315 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0311 Modem 2 slave Distant end offline modem of a CSAT addresses are set amp 1 1 pair cannot be polled directly automatically by the modem For fault status use OUS query when the modem ODU control is to the online modem enabled so it is important that the modem be configured first CSAT 1 0914 Modem 9 RCA 0 CSAT 2 0915 Modem 1 ESA MCA 0911 ig Modem 2 EDMAC slave CSAT 1 1014 CSAT 2 1015 Modem 1 ESA MCA 1011 Modem 2 EDMAC slave MCA 0900 EDMAC master ESA 0910 10 RCA 0 1000 EDMAC master ESA 1010 Redundant RCA 0 Modem MCA 1100 Serial comm via LEGEND 11 EDMAC as 15 or 25 pin cables Traffi
235. pe HD HSSI SCSI II female connector on the CIC 60 Adapter Module to e DB 25F connector labeled Data Interface on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 4 3 7 LVDS Data Connections If LVDS is the driving traffic data type see Figure 4 9 Figure 4 11 and Figure 4 12 First connect the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for control data purposes between the Redundant CDM 625 A and the Switch RMI see Sect 4 4 3 1 Then do these steps to connect and secure the Control Data Cable CA WROO66 for data purposes between the Switch TMI s and Traffic CDM 625 A s e DB 25M connector labeled P1 on the Switch TMI s to e DB 25F connector labeled Data Interface on the Traffic CDM 625 A s 4 4 3 8 Ethernet Data Connections n 1 When you use the CDM 625 A in Dedicated Management Ethernet Port mode this disables all four of the offline modem s Ethernet ports unless you configure one of the four ports as the Dedicated Management Port For more information see Sect 5 4 13 3 CONFIG IP Setup in the CDM 625 or CDM 625A Advanced Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manuals 2 When you use Ethernet with no Sub Mux as the dedicated data interface for the redundancy system you must use the wired thru method explained in Sect 4 4 3 8 1 to make all cabling connections 4 26 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 3 When you use Ethernet in combination with other data interfaces in the
236. racter alphabetic sequence which identifies the subject of the message Wherever possible the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance e g TFQ for transmit frequency RMD for receive modulation type etc This aids in the readability of the message should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used A Z ASCII codes 65 through 90 7 5 1 5 Instruction Code Qualifier This is a single character which further qualifies the preceding instruction code Instruction Code Qualifiers obey the following rules 1 From Controller to Target the only permitted values are Code Qualifier Description is used as the Assignment Operator and is used to indicate that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the ASCII code 61 argument s which follow it For example BKH 12 would mean set the Back up Hold Off time to 12 seconds is used as the Query Operator and is used to indicate that the Target should return the current value of the parameters defined by the ASCII code 63 preceding byte For example BKH means what is the current value of Back up Hold Off time 2 From Target to Controller the only permitted values are Code Qualifier Description The qualifier is used in two ways ASCII code 61 a Ifthe Controller sends a query to a Target for example BKH means what is the current
237. raffic Modem 2 not using CnC CDM 625 Traffic Modem 1 using CnC Figure 4 8 CDM 625 A to CDM 625 A CnC Cable Connection Example Connections shown for Redundant Modem and Traffic Modems 1 2 and 3 only 4 20 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 4 3 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modem Table 4 1 shows the TMI and applicable data and control cables that you will need for each of the various data types Table 4 1 CDM 625 A Cable Usage RMI TMI CDM 625 A Cable Usage see Appendix B CABLE DRAWINGS for cable details Driving Traffic Data Type CRS 310 RMI Cable s TMI Cable s Control CA WR0066 Control CA WR0066 BalUnbal Data CA 0000072 CRS 330 340 CA 0000072 G 703 Control CA WRO066 Control CAWR0066 Sect 4 4 3 2 Data CA 0000072 Data CA 0000072 Control CAWRO066 Control 0000069 Data PL 0813 8 2 Data PL 0813 8 2X G 703 Quad E1 Control CA WRO066 m Control CA 0000069 Sect 4 4 3 3 Data CA 0000073 Data CA 0000136 2X Control CAWRO066 Control CA 0000069 Rd Data PL 0813 8 2X Data PL 0813 8 2X Unbalanced CRS 316 Control CA 0000069 EIA 422 Sect 4 4 3 5 Control Data CA WRO066 Data CAWROOG6 Control CA WR0066 CRS 340 Control 0000069 HSSI Sect 4 4 3 6 Control Data CA WROO066 CRS 336 Data CA WR9189 6 with CIC 60 Adapter Module LVDS Sect 4 4 3 7 Control Data CA WR0
238. re 4 1 or Figure 4 2 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO66 cable between the CRS 300 and the CRS 280 280L DB 25M connector labeled IF Switch Control on the CRS 300 s CRS 230 System Controller to e DB 25F connector on the rear panel of the CRS 280 280L CRS 300 to CRS 350 Connection See Figure 4 3 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WROO66 cable between the CRS 300 and the CRS 350 e DB 25M connector labeled IF Switch Control on the CRS 300 s CRS 230 System Controller to e DB 25F connector on the rear panel of the CRS 350 CRS 300 to CRS 350 and CRS 280 280L Connection See Figure 4 4 or Figure 4 5 and do these steps to first connect and secure the CA WROO66 cable between the CRS 300 and CRS 350 e DB 25M connector labeled IF Switch Control on the CRS 300 s CRS 230 System Controller to e DB 25F connector on the rear panel of the CRS 350 Next do these steps to connect and secure the second 25 pin CA WROO66 cable between the CRS 350 and CRS 280 280L e DB 25M connector on the CRS 350 to e DB 25F connector on the rear panel of the CRS 280 280L 4 4 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 o JE CRS 230 System Controller CA WRO0066 CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch Rear Panel CC unm MANUFACTURED IN THE USA BY COMTECH EF DATA CORPORATION TO CRS SWITCH IF CONTROL Figure 4 1 Control Cable Conn
239. rnal communications between the Switch and the modems 6 2 2 5 CONFIG ACTIVE Activate Modems ACTIVE MODEMS ENTER Lo Use the lt gt arrow keys to select which Traffic Modem to activate and then use the A V arrow keys to activate or deactivate the modem A modem must be active in order for it to be available for bridge or backup A hyphen appears in place of the modem number if it is deactivated If a Traffic Modem interface is not plugged into a slot that position cannot be activated Once activated the Switch expects that modem to be connected and it polls the modem for status information When adding or removing a modem in an operating 1 N Switch system it is important to keep the traffic safe by preventing any contention in the system from an unsuppressed modem Tx carrier CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 Do these steps to add an additional Traffic Modem to the redundancy system 1 Attach all control data and IF cables as explained in Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS 2 Configure the modem and Switch as explained in Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION Do these steps to remove a Traffic Modem that is not being backed up 1 Use the CONFIG ACTIVE menu to de activate the modem from its active state in the Switch configuration use the lt gt arrow keys to select the pertinent modem TMI position and then use the V arr
240. rs UNIT STATUS UNIT STATUS TRANSMIT PROMPT TRANSMIT PROMPT RECEIVE PROMPT RECEIVE PROMPT DEFERAED OLFERRED ON REDUNDANT 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 TRAFFIC MOOEM 1 This array of front panel LEDs located below the Unit Status LED Indicators group keypad and VFD show the operational status for up to 10 Traffic Modems six LEDs per modem plus the Redundant Modem five LEDs They function independently as follows Green Normal Normal operation Unit Tx or Rx Fault no Unit Normal operation Unit Tx or Rx Fault or Rx Fault Unit Fault UNIT STATUS Rx and Tx fault for SLM 5650 5650A Tx or Rx Fault e not installed TRANSMIT PROMPT Green Normal operation no Tx Fault off Tx Faut RECEIVE PROMPT Green Normal operation no Rx Fault RxFaul DEFERRED Off Normal operation no Deferred Maintenance Alarm CM mr A Deferred Maintenance Alarm oux Normal operation Modem traffic active to from User ONLINE oux No modem traffic active to from User Traffic modem is bridged or in Hot Standby verifies that BRIDGED 3 Redundant Modem is configured identically to this modem Off Not bridged 6 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 1 2 Front Panel Keypad The CRS 300 front panel keypad contains six individual key switches mou
241. s Select Configuration gt Remote gt Remote Control Remote RS 232 gt set baud rate to 9600 Then use the CDM 625 A Font Panel menu to configure the CDM 625 A for 1 N Redundancy make sure to press ENTER to save your changes Do these steps 5 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Step Task 1 Configure the DB 25 Data connector on the modem rear panel for Redundancy Mode On each modem set 1 N redundancy to the Active state Select Utility gt 1 N gt Enable Disable gt set to Enable 2 Power down all CDM 625 As 3 Power up all CDM 625 As Verify that front panel LEDs indicate that each Traffic Modem is ONLINE 5 2 4 1 1 Configure CDM 625 A 1 N Redundancy for Carrier in Carrier If you use Carrier in Carrier CnC with any CDM 625 A traffic modem special configuration steps must be taken to make sure proper operation of the modem s within a configured 1 N Redundancy System Before you make any configurations changes see Figure 4 8 and the instructions found in Section 4 4 2 in Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS to connect and secure the CA 0000275 PMSI Multi drop CnC Plus Cable 11X DB 9M 8 25 between the Redundant Modem and all other Traffic Modem s using CnC n The CA 0000275 cable bypasses the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Once you interconnect all CnC enabled modems with the PMSI Multi drop Cable you must then conf
242. s 1 and 3 only CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 710 connected to CRS 306 RMI F Nt m em AE o CA WR12361 1 CA WR9189 6 1 i User Data m K a mi j cds 5 XA Remote mat enr Es CDM 710 connected to CRS 336 TMI 3 CAIWR12361 1 CA WR9189 6 oy ary meas Se CDM 710 connected to CRS 336 TMI 1 Figure 4 29 Control and Data Cables Example 2 CRS 300 to CDM 710 Connections shown for RMI amp TMIs 1 and 3 only 4 71 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 Notes 4 72 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 10 CDM 700 Modem Connections e RMI TMI Limitations and Considerations e Interface Combinations e Control Cable Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems e Wired thru Connections e Wired around Connections e User Data Connections CRS 300 to Users CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 I1OM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 10 CDM 700 Modem Connections If adding a modem to an operating 1 N system care needs to be taken not to interfere with the existing traffic The cabling power up sequence and commu
243. s between Switch and modems set via modem front panels RCA 7000 CRS 300 MCA 7000 External RS 485 SWITCH Multi drop connection ESA EDMAC Slave Address Range set via Traffic Modem front panels Note 1 1 internal redundancy in EDMAC Slave mode is available only in firmware version 1 6 2 or later Figure C 6 CRS 300 Addressing Scheme Example External EIA 485 with CDM Qx QxL Modems C 8 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Appendix C External RS 485 Multi drop connection LOCAL END Hub DISTANT END Hub EDMAC Master EDMAC Slave Modem 1 Modem 2 RCA 0100 ESA 0100 MCA 7100 AA N MCA 7111 EDMAC master EDMAC LINK 2 EDMAC slave ESA 0110 ESA 0111 RCA 0200 ESA 0200 MCA 7200 1 WE Modem 2 MCA 7211 EDMAC master EDMAC slave ESA 0210 ESA 0211 Modem 3 Modem 9 Redundant Modem 11 Modem 10 RCA 0300 MCA 7300 EDMAC master ESA 0310 ESA 0400 MCA 7311 EDMAC slave ESA 0311 14 mere M ESA 0500 RCA 0900 7500 7900 EDMAC master EDMAC master Ahn ESA 0510 ESA 0910 EDMAC LINK to Remote Site gt RCA 1000 MCA 8000 EDMAC master ESA 1010 Modem 4 Redundant RCA 1100 RCA 1100 Modem 11 MCA 8100 1 MCA 8100 EDMAC EDMAC as d Traffic Modem Traffic Modem CRS 300 SWITCH LEGEND RCA 7000 7000 CRS 300 MCA 7000 1 SWITCH
244. s tactile feedback The VFD shows data menus prompts and messages The VFD is an active display with adjustable brightness It shows two lines of 24 characters each Nested menus show all available options and prompts that guide you in carrying out required actions Vacuum Fluorescent Display VFD Rack Handles In a rack enclosure these handles help you install and remove the unit Figure 1 3 CRS 300 Front Panel Features 1 7 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 3 2 Rear Panel e Chapter 3 SWITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS e Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION Figure 1 4 shows the back panel of the CRS 300 with an example array of installedTMI cards Because the RMI can have the capability for several TMIs depending on user n requirements the CRS 300 may be able to use several different TMI cards simultaneously CRS 306 2X Unused 6X CRS 325 2X CRS 336 RMI Blanks TMI vm A hg 19UJ8di3 cr CRS 230 CRS 250 CRS 250 Power Supply Module System Controller Power Supply Module Figure 1 4 CRS 300 Rear Panel Configuration Example CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 3 3 Plug in Module Card Assemblies Chapter 3 SWITCH CONNECTORS AND PINOUTS 1 3 3 1 CRS 300 System Controller Card Assembly DB 9 Female DB 25 Male System 1 ES Y 2 Controller Figure 1 5 CRS 230 9 dia 485 Pass Through IF Sw
245. secssecssecsaecseesesesseesseeeseneseseeaes 1 11 Figure 1 13 CRS 370 TMI HSSI PL 9034 1 csccesssssssesscsssssssesssessseecseecseecsueceaeceaeceaesaeseeesueeesenesenessaes 1 12 Figure 1 14 CRS 305 RMI PL 11494 1 ssssseseeeeenenen nennen nennen nennen nnns 1 13 Figure 1 15 CRS 306 RMI PL 11494 2 sssseseeeeee enne enn nnne nnne nnne 1 13 Figure 1 16 CRS 307 RMI PL 11494 3 ccceccscsscssssssscesscecseecssecssecsaecsaeceaeceaesssseeesseesseaescseseseessaessaessass 1 13 Figure 1 17 CRS 315 TM iuste etes rede iacente 1 14 Figure 1 18 CRS 316 TMI RS422 or GigE PL 12498 1 ceccsecssecssecssecesecesessesseesssessceescaeseeeeeecsaeesaes 1 14 Figure 1 19 CRS 325 TMI G 703 or ASI PL 11492 1 isses enenatis 1 14 Figure 1 20 CRS 315 etn dec nette eee n costae a sen fee ade iet nes aide edes d each adds 1 14 Figure 1 21 CRS 336 TMI HSSI or GigE PL 12499 1 ssssssesseeseeeeenenenenen enne nnne nnn nnne nnns 1 14 Figure 1 22 CRS 345 TMI G 703 4 ports PL 11495 1 essesseeseeeenenenennn nnns 1 15 Figure 1 23 CRS 365 TMI E1 1 4 ports PL 12985 1 ssesseesseeeeeenenen enne nnns nnn nnn 1 15 Figure 1 24 CRS 350 ESC Switch Front Panel cccccssscccccecsssesseaececeeseeesesaeaeeeeeceseesesaeaeeeesesseeseaaeas 1 15 Figur
246. see Description of Arguments AMQ2 XxXXXXXXXXX see Description of Arguments BBU xyy see Description of Arguments BKH xx see Description of Arguments 7 9 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch Serial based Remote Product Management Parameter Type Config Load Config Store Equipment ID Command Code and qualifier CST NIA Arguments for Command or Response to Que 1 byte numerical 0109 1 byte numerical 0to9 6 bytes numerical 4 bytes alphanumeric Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Command only Forces the Switch to retrieve the Configuration Memory location defined by the argument 0 to 9 and to re program the Switch with that stored configuration Command or Query The command forces the Switch to store the its current configuration in Configuration Memory location defined by the argument 0 to 9 Example CST 4 Store current configuration in location 4 WARNING Use with caution If the location already contains data it will be automatically overwritten If in doubt query the location first The query returns the contents of the location Command or Query The date in the form ddmmyy international date convention where dd day of the month between 01 and 31 mm month of the year between 01 and 12 and yy year between 97 and 96 1997 to 2000 then 2000 to 2096 Exampl
247. sses ener ennemis 4 76 4 10 6 User Data Connections CRS 300 to ee ene ene enne 4 77 4 11 CDM 600 L Modem Connections sccccccccsssssseseececccecsssseseecsccceacanssescecececeecansseseeceesens 4 86 4 11 1 Control and Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems sese 4 86 4 11 2 User Data Connections CRS 300 to 4 88 4 11 3 ESC Data Connections Modems to 350 4 88 4 11 4 User ESC Data Connections CRS 350 to 33 emen 4 88 CHAPTER 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION eere eee enne 5 1 5 2 Configure Your Modertrs 55 oorr iieri ses oro pko Fo o ansa E NSA EE SERERE EE o Unas a EE Eua Fa aa GERENS 5 2 5 2 1 Connect Your Modem Power ccccccccccsssssessseeececesseseaeaeceeeessseseceseceeecesseseeaeaeeeescesseseaaeaeeeesens 5 2 5 2 2 Modem Firmware and Hardware Requirements esses eene 5 2 5 2 2 1 Update Your Modem Firmware esses eene eene enne nnne 5 3 5 2 3 Configure Your Modem Operation ccccscccccccessssesssceceeecessesesneseceeecessesesaeaeeeesesssessaeaeeeesens 5 3 5 2 4 Configure Your Modems for 1 N Redundancy nennen nnne 5 3 5 2 4 1 Configure Switch to CDM 625 A 1 N Redundancy ccccccessceessececs
248. sssssetsccecessessnsseesececessesseasacsececeesenssauacsecesseseausensceecess 3 3 2 2 Wired around Connection cccccccccesssssssccecececsssesnsaeeeeecessesesaeaeeeceeessesaaaeeeeeesseesessaaeeeeess A 3 A 3 4 Hub to Hub with Standard Traffic using Routers eene nennen A 4 A 3 5 Hub to Hub with Standard Traffic using Switches sees A 6 A 3 6 Hub to Remotes with Standard Traffic using Routers or 5 A 8 A 3 7 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic using Routers Point to Multipoint A 10 A 3 8 Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic using Switches Point to Multipoint A 12 5 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Table of Contents Revision 19 APPENDIX B CABLE DRAWINGS 11 15 eode ceo oer ecu na ra Depot Fa ee a ERE aa a vn palet eaa eda D es edo Rae Ee RE Se B 1 B 1 BE aT ENS EI AEN EE 1 B 2 User Utility Cables ic csciss TE B 1 B 2 1 Switch to User EIA 530 to EIA 422 449 Data Conversion Cable DB 25M gt DB 37F B 2 B 2 2 Switch to User EIA 530 to V 35 Data Conversion Cable DB 25M Winchester 34F B 3 B 2 3 Switch to User Monitor and Control M amp C Cable 0 9 9 4 B 3 Control Cables iis iiiecscssvisvsceciesceceieiscesse
249. storing the configuration of the Switch will be erased so you are then required to re enter the desired configuration Firmware Update Procedure is now complete The CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch is now operating with its current firmware 5 6 2 Configure the CRS 300 Switch Operation Q Chapter 6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION The Switch should show a GREEN Unit Status LED If it is RED go to MONITOR gt SW ALARM to view the faults Make sure that the preceding Redundant Modem setup is complete and that it is operating correctly before proceeding Use the CRS 300 Front Panel keypad and display to configure the Switch as instructed in the subsections that follow 5 6 2 1 Activate the Traffic Modems Comtech EF Data ships the Switch with no Traffic Modems set to Active You may operate the Switch with only some of the 10 slots filled occupied A TMI can be active only when present If there are unused 5 in the Switch make sure you use the CONFIG ACTIVE menu to deactivate them The Switch will actively poll any activated Traffic Modems Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to activate the desired Traffic Modems make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the keys to select the CONFIG ACTIVE menu 2 Use the T arrow key to activate all desired Traffic Modems 5 25 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Once you press
250. structions to connect a variety of Switch and modem configurations Sect 4 2 Switch to Switch Connections e Sect 4 3 IF Cable Connections e Sect 4 4 CDM 625 A Modem Connections e Sect 4 5 CDM 570 A CDM 570L AL Modem Connections e Sect 4 6 SLM 5650 5650A Modem Connections e 4 7 CDM Qx QxL Modem Connections Sect 4 8 CDM 710G 710GL Modem Connections e Sect 4 9 CDM 710 Modem Connections Sect 4 10 CDM 700 Modem Connections 4 11 CDM 600 L Modem Connections CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 2 Switch to Switch Connections e CRS 300 to CRS 280 280L Connection e CRS 300 to CRS 350 Connection e CRS 300 to CRS 350 to CRS 280 280L Connection CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 Switch to Switch Connections If your redundancy system requires the Comtech EF Data CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF CRS 280L L Band IF and or CRS 350 Engineering Service Channel ESC Switch for use only with the CDM 600 L CDM 625 A or SLM 5650 5650A modems you need to use Control Data Cable CA WROO066 to connect the Switches Comtech EF Data provides this cable with each Each CRS 280 280L and CRS 350 Switch The sections that follow explain the switch to switch cable connections that you must make between the CRS 300 CRS 350 and the CRS 280 280L CRS 300 to CRS 280 280L Connection See Figu
251. t Modem cannot be activated 1 TMI present but modem not activated 2 TMI present modem activated and responding 3 TMI present modem activated but not responding Command or Query The bridge back up state followed by the selected TM to be acted on where xis 0 bridge 1 back up only possible when in manual mode and yy is 01 10 for modem number Command or Query The backup holdoff time is the delay when auto mode prepares to backup a faulted modem where 01 99 of seconds delay after Redundant Modem has acquired Traffic Modem s configuration before online swap actually takes place Command only Instructs the unit to clear all Stored Events This command takes no arguments Query Code and qualifier Response to Command Target to Controller AAM message OK AAM received OK but invalid arguments found AAM message OK but only permitted in Remote mode message OK ACT received OK but invalid arguments ACT message OK but not permitted in current mode BBU message OK BBU received OK but invalid arguments BBU message OK but not permitted in current mode BKH message OK BKH received OK but invalid arguments BKH message OK but only permitted in Remote CAE message OK message OK but only permitted in Remote MN CRS300 IOM Revision 19 Response to query Target to Controller AAM x see Description of Arguments ACT XXXXXXXXXX
252. t Modem can then be used to back up the newly faulted modem If you do not enable the Priority selection see Sect 6 2 2 3 1 CONFIG OPTIONS PRIORITY then the Switch deals with Traffic Modem failures on a first come first serve basis If you set the Switch to bridge the highest priority circuit this will minimize switching time in the event of a failure If two faults occur simultaneously and are both sustained for the holdoff time then the Switch will back up the lower numbered circuit 5 28 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to set the Restore Holdoff Period Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the lt keys to select the nested CONFIG OPTIONS HOLDOFFS menu 2 Change the RESTORE HOLDOFF to any number in the range of 1 to 99 seconds 5 6 2 6 Set the Alarm Masks Another way to adjust the Switch s reaction in AUTO mode is to mask modem faults You may disable modem Rx Tx or both fault types so that the Switch does not react to them This masking prevents the Switch from taking automatic action and prevents the logging of the faults in the stored events list These masks are global to all the modems attached to the Switch Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to set the Alarm Masks Do these steps Step Procedure 1 Use the keys to select the nested CONFIG OPTIONS gt MASKS gt MODEM ALARMS menu 2 Set the mask p
253. ta Connections CRS 300 to User You must connect your traffic data from the external router multiplexing equipment or test data generator to the connectors on the Switch TMI labeled User Data Interface This interface replaces the direct connection to the Traffic CDM 700 s Data Interface connectors If you choose the wire around method for Ethernet traffic your traffic interface will be on the user provided switch Because the Redundant CDM 700 s function is to replace a faulted Traffic CDM 700 the Switch RMI does not have a User Data Interface See Sect 1 4 3 3 Modem Interface Cards for detailed information on the Switch RMI and TMI cards available for use with the CDM 700 modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 CDM 700 connected to CRS 305 t 12278 1 4 8 BNCs USED AN ae P 9 9 we mt B CDM 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 8 CA WR12361 1 CAIRF12278 1 4 8 BNCs USED CA WR12361 1 DM QN i Te AS CDM 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 3 CA WR12361 1 m CA RF12279 1 ua le mE xil XM CDM 700 connected to CRS 345 TMI 1 ad aw m emo D Figure 4 30 Control and Traffic Data Cables Example 1 CRS 300 to CDM 700 Connections shown for RMI and TMls 1 3 and 8 only MN CRS300 IOM CRS 300 1 10 Redund
254. tage The Unit Status front panel LED will be RED Suggestions e Ensure power supply power cord is connected and the power switch is ON e Replace defective power supply module If the second power supply module is not needed you can mask this Alarm SWITCH ALARM RM TIMEOUT RM I O TIMEOUT There is a fault Communication has been lost to the Redundant Modem The Unit Status front panel LED will be RED Suggestions e Check cable connections see Chapter 4 CABLES AND CONNECTIONS e Check modem configurations see Chapter 5 MODEM RMI TMI AND SWITCH CONFIGURATION SWITCH ALARM RM TIMEOUT MGC refused code 12 TFT There is a fault COMMs are good to the Redundant Modem but the configuration of the bridged Traffic Modem cannot be configured into the Redundant Modem The Unit Status front panel LED will be RED Suggestion Ensure the most capable modem with regard to FAST options installed options e g Turbo card firmware version and hardware revision is used as the Redundant Modem CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 The code indicates the parameter within the MGC configuration string that is causing the Redundant Modem to refuse it The three letter instruction code is indicated also to assist decoding the following problem parameters gt For the CDM 570 A or CDM 570L AL modem the code is the decimal number indicating the fault parameter within its MG
255. tece EENE EEE EE 5 B 3 1 Switch to Modem Control Cable for CDM 625 A 15 9 B 6 B 3 2 Switch to Modem Control Cable for SLM 5650 5650A 15 gt 15 B 7 3 3 Switch to Modem Optional Y Control Cable for SLM 5650 5650A HD 15M HD 15M DB29F i tutt sme Coa rca tee ade B 8 B 3 4 Switch to Modem Standard EIA 485 Multi Drop Shielded Cable for CDM Qx QxL 15X DB 9F nod dA uot Er utem ht aue beet abs ra tfe Rer phus ei B 9 B 3 5 485 Cable Termination for CDM Qx QxL Multi Drop Cables 0 9 B 10 B 3 6 Switch to Modem EIA 485 Null Modem Cable for CDM Qx QxL DB 9M DB 9M B 11 B 3 7 Modem to Modem Optional EIA 485 Multi Drop Ribbon Cable for CDM Qx QxL 15X DB 9F Shoe Rete iet os det La 12 B 3 8 Switch to Modem Y Control Cable for CDM Qx QxL with Cnc 15 gt 2 DB 15F B 13 B 3 9 Switch to Modem Control Cable for CDM 7XX 15 156 B 14 B 4 Control IF Data Cables amp Accessories ueeeeeeee esee esee ee eene enne nennen nnn n nnn nuna B 15 4 1 Switch to Modem Switch to User EIA 232 422 EIA 530 Control and Data Cable DB 25bM 2 DB 25F irit cte ttti een t ter eee e hio t e usi er eet ra e etes B 18 B 4 2 Switch to Modem Mo
256. ters include the ability to hide computers behind a type of firewall which involves slightly modifying the packets of network traffic as they traverse the device All routers include some kind of user interface for configuring how the router will treat traffic larger routers include the equivalent of a full blown programming language to describe how they should operate as well as the ability to communicate with other routers to describe or determine the best way to direct network traffic from Point A to Point B An Ethernet switch examines the traffic that comes across it and learns where particular MAC addresses are An Ethernet switch maintains what is known as a CAM Content Addressable Memory table listing the MAC addresses for each switch port The Ethernet switch uses the CAM table to determine where to forward Ethernet frames By default Ethernet switches will update the CAM table automatically for example if an Ethernet switch sees traffic from Machine A CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 A 3 A 3 1 coming in on Port 2 it now knows that Machine A is connected to that port and that traffic destined for Machine A needs to only be sent to that port and not any of the others Ethernet Configuration Examples This section explains the problems with Ethernet Networking Loops and how to properly design applications architecture for handling Standard traffic and Split path
257. the Bridge LED is lit for only one Traffic Modem For modems Use the read only INFO and MONITOR screens to view the status of the modems in addition to viewing the LEDs For the Switch Use the read only MONITOR COMM STATE screen to verify that the modems are responding via remote control For real time monitoring Use the read only MONITOR I O screen to verify that the modems are responding via remote control Communication is slowed to aid viewing Q Do not leave the Switch in this view 5 26 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 5 6 2 3 Setthe Switch Operation Mode Comtech EF Data ships the Switch in the AUTO OFF manual operating mode The CRS 300 Front Panel menu identifies this manual mode as AUTO OFF When in AUTO OFF manual mode e Although the system is operational this operational setting causes the Stored Event LED to blink e You may manually select which Traffic Modem to bridge or back up e The Switch does not automatically react to any Traffic Modem failures it detects Comtech EF Data recommends that you configure an unattended system to operate in AUTO mode When you enable AUTO mode the first active modem that fails is first bridged by the Redundant Modem and then backed up Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to enable AUTO mode make sure to press ENT to save your changes Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the keys to select the
258. the Switch generates new log entries for those faults 6 2 4 4 MONITOR COMMS Communications State GOOD COMMS WITH MODEMS 125 5 7 8 ue This display shows that the state of communications between the Switch and modems In this example the Switch has good monitoring 1 0 communications with the indicated modems CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 4 5 MONITOR IO lt 0100 LRS gt 0100 LRS 1 This display shows actual communication strings between the Switch and the modems e Upper line Switch controller s outbound messages e Lower line Modem s inbound responses Q These are configurations for the Switch itself not the modems to which it is attached When in this mode communication is slowed down to enable viewing of messages This display should therefore be used for troubleshooting purposes only 6 2 5 SELECT STORE LD Store or Load Configuration STORE LOAD CONFIG STORE LOAD PRESS ENTER Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select STORE or LOAD and then press ENT You can store or load up to 10 different configurations in the Switch s non volatile memory n These are configurations for the Switch itself not the modems to which it is attached 6 2 5 1 STORE LD STORE STORE CONFIGURATION TO LOCATION 10 ENTER Use the A V arrow keys to select the location to where the current configuration is to be loaded and then press ENT Locations 1 through 10
259. the plug onto the jack posts Then turn the plug clockwise until the jack posts are fully seated within the plug slot e Threaded Coupling Connections Engage the plug onto the jack threads and then turn the plug clockwise until it is fully threaded onto the jack Do not over tighten the connection 3 1 1 1 Type BNC BNC connectors feature a Bayonet Coupling design 3 1 1 2 Type TNC TNC connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type N Type F and Type SMA connectors 3 1 1 3 Type N Type N connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type TNC Type F and Type SMA connectors 3 1 1 4 Type F Type F connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to Type TNC Type N and Type SMA connectors CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 1 1 5 Type SMA Subminiature Version A Type SMA connectors feature a Threaded Coupling design similar to nu Type TNC Type N and Type F connectors a 3 3 1 2 D Subminiature Cable Connections Type D Connection Type Example Pin 1 Chassis Receptacles em CE a BOTTOM Male Oe 1 Type Cable With Jack Screws Ala S Female Shown Figure 3 2 D Subminiature Connector Examples D Subminiature connectors are also called Type D or
260. tions or antennas e The CRS 280L L Band Switch is necessary when one or more modems within the redundancy system connect to the other polarization of the antenna or to multiple antennas The system may forego using the CRS 280 280L and in its place passively combine or split the modulator outputs and demodulator inputs when the entire group of modems is connected to the same up down converter In these applications the CRS 300 mutes the faulted modem s Tx carrier and enables the standby unit s carrier Comtech EF Data CRS 280L 1 N Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CRS280L IOM CRS 350 Option Figure 1 24 through Figure 1 26 in Sect 1 4 show details of the CRS 350 ESC Switch You may add this unit if you require protection of the IDR overhead signals backward alarms audio ESC data ESC etc 1 3 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Introduction Revision 19 1 1 1 System Level Block Diagram Figure 1 1 shows the system level block diagram of the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch including the optional CRS 280 280L IF and CRS 350 ESC Switches 3 User Alarms Audio Overhead CRS 350 ESC Switch Optional TMI 1 eee To Up User Terrestrial Converters pas CRS 280 280L IF Switch Optional Modem 10 See Fig 1 2 for schematic From Down Modem 11 Converters Control CRS 230 System Controller CRS 300 Front Panel Keypad LCD and LED Display CRS
261. to Que 1 byte numerical 1 byte numerical 29 bytes numerical 24 bytes ASCII Description of Arguments Note that all arguments are ASCII numerical codes that is ASCII codes between 48 and 57 Command or Query Where x indicates the Switch alarm mask 0 no faults masked 1 PSU A faults masked 2 PSU B faults masked Command or Query This command allows the Switch to send commands to all attached modems on a d aily basis to settheirtime an d date values to the same as the S witch This value is also saved i n nonv olatile memory t o r etain s etting during a power outage The factory default setting is SDT 0 SwitchDataTime where x where 0 turns off this feature 1 enables this feature Example SDT 1 Command or Query Global configuration of the Switch in the form OaaaaaaaaaaBNNbbrrMSAssssssss where Operating Mode same as OPM 1 bytes a Active Modems same as ACT 10 bytes Bridge Backup State same as BBU 1 byte N Selected TM Number same as BBU 2 bytes b Backup Holdoff Time same as BKH 2 byte Restore Holdoff Time same as RSH 2 byte M Modem Alarm Mask same as 1 byte S Switch Alarm Mask same as SAM 1 byte A Audio Alarm Mask same as AAM 1 bytes P Priority mode same as PRI S 7 spare bytes Command or Query A user defined Switch ID which is a fixed length of 24 characters Valid characters include Space
262. tors labeled Rx on the CDM 700 s CDI 50 plug in module 4 10 5 Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems You have two choices for handling Ethernet traffic data e Ifthe Traffic Modem uses Ethernet as the sole traffic data type then you must route the Ethernet data through the Switch like G 703 or HSSI data This is known as the wired thru method for processing data through the Switch e Ifthe Traffic Modem uses Ethernet plus another data type like G 703 or HSSI then the Ethernet data can be routed around the Switch This is known as the wired around method for processing data around the Switch Appendix ETHERNET NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS 4 10 5 1 Wired thru Connections For the wired thru connection method see Figure 4 32 and Figure 4 33 Do these steps to connect and secure the CAT5 Data Cable PP CATSFF7FTGY between the Switch and each CDM 700 e RJ 45 connector labeled J5 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e RJ 45 connector labeled J1 on the CDM 700 CDI 70 plug in modules 4 10 5 2 Wired around Connections For the wired around connection method see Figure 4 34 and Figure 4 35 Do these steps to connect and secure the CAT5 Data Cable PP CATSFF7FTGY for each CDM 700 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Cables and Connections Revision 19 e RJ 45 connector labeled J1 on the CDM 700 CDI 70 plug in module to e RJ 45 connector on the user provided Ethernet switch 4 10 6 User Da
263. traffic using routers A Static ARP Entry is needed in the switch so that routing of the Tx side of the modems will be on the correct port of the router For example the Rx side of the Ethernet connection for Traffic Modem N comes in the bottom port of the Router but the Tx Ethernet connection must be connected through the same port as Traffic Modem 1 as shown in this figure Hub to Remotes Remote Carriers 7 Transponder Hub end B Footprint A Hub B gt Hub Traffic Modem 1 o9 TX Rx Network Router T MM ommem s Traffic Modem N Rx P Manun Static ARP Entries Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem e TxIRX 6 gt On ode 5s oe Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem N TX RX M j gt Oe CON ea J Figure A 10 Point to Multipoint Using Routers A wired thru Ethernet redundancy example is shown in Figure A 11 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the router does not change because the Ethernet connection is properly rerouted within the CRS 300 from the Traffic Modem to the Redundant Modem A wired around Ethernet redundancy example is shown for the CDM 700 User in Figure A 12 When the CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch backs up a faulted Traffic Modem the physical port on the router needs to change from the Traffic Modem port to the Redundant Modem port Because of this special router conf
264. ty functions 6 2 6 1 UTILITY SET RTC Set Real Time Clock EDIT REAL TIME CLOCK 12 00 00 24 04 14 ENT To edit the time and date Use the 4 gt arrow keys to select a digit and then use the A V arrow keys to edit that value Press ENT when done Note that the date is shown in DD MM YY format in accordance with international convention 6 2 6 2 UTILITY DISPLAY Display Brightness EDIT DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 100 PRESS ENTER Use the A arrow keys to select a VFD brightness level of 25 50 75 or 100 and then press ENT 6 21 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Front Panel Operation Revision 19 6 2 6 3 UTILITY SWITCH ID EDIT SWITCH ID CRS 300 TEST MESSAGE To edit the Switch ID string Use the lt gt arrow keys to select the cursor position on the bottom line and then use the A Warrow keys to edit the character in that position You may use the following characters space Othrough 9 and A through Z A maximum of 24 characters are allowed Press ENT when done 6 2 64 UTILITY TEST This is an excellent method to test the whole system before setting the Switch for automatic mode Once you select this screen the Switch suspends normal system polling and initiates a test CONFIG TESTING 2 TM 1 OK TEST COMPLETE CHECK 2 The total configuration of each activated modem is configured into the Redundant Modem in sequence If any configuration is not a
265. ure 5 6 1 2 1 Getting Started Prepare for the Firmware Download Connect the Switch Remote Control connector located on the CRS 230 System Controller to a serial port on your Windows based User PC Make sure that you are running a terminal emulator program on your PC such as Tera Term or PuTTY Identify the CRS 300 firmware number and current running version e From the Switch front panel the firmware version is available from the VFD s top level splash screen To view this screen press the CLR key several times For more information see Chapter 6 FRONT PANEL OPERATION Using Serial Remote Control query the firmware version can be obtained with the lt OSWR query For more information see Chapter 7 SERIAL BASED REMOTE PRODUCT MANAGEMENT Create a temporary folder subdirectory on the User PC for the firmware archive file download e These examples use drive letter c You may use any valid writable drive letter e Typical for all tasks Type the command without quotes and then press ENT to execute You may create a temporary folder on a Windows based PC using differing methods A Usethe Windows Desktop to create and rename the temporary folder e Right click anywhere on the desktop to open the popup submenu and then select New gt Folder to create the temporary folder The New Folder will be created on the desktop Right click on the New Folder and then select Rename from the popup submenu R
266. ure 5 9 show the CRS 336 TMI CEFD P N PL 12499 Rev B or later Comtech EF Data ships these TMIs with jumpers JP1 and JP2 pre set on a per modem basis e For CDM 625 A modems the jumper settings for the CA to TA Loop are o Pin 1 to Pin 3 JP1 and JP2 jumped e For SLM 5650A modems the jumpers settings are o Pin 1 to Pin 2 jumped o Pin 3 to Pin 4 JP1 and JP2 jumped Jumpers JP1 and JP2 See Figure 5 9 Tables 5 6 and 5 7 for details IW dmesg CRS 336 CRS 336 PCB Top View Front Panel View Figure 5 8 CRS 336 HSSI or Ethernet TMI Card 5 17 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Modem RMI TMI and Switch Configuration Revision 19 TO REDUNDANT NODEM TO REDUNDANT MODEM 30 3 YSN 05 0 NOTES SLM 5650A s FOR CA amp TA CONNECTION INSTALL JUMPERS ON JPI amp JP2 PIN 1 TO 2 amp 3 TO 4 CDM 825 s FOR CA TA LOQP RL INSTALL JUMPERS ON JPI amp 2 PIN 1 TO 3 NOTE ON CIC 60 RR 23 IF MUTE IS N C NOM OS GH Figure 5 9 CRS 336 JP1 and JP2 Jumper Detail As Shipped Table 5 6 CRS 336 Jumper JP1 Settings User Interface Jumper JP1 Jumper Settings Control Signal Setting Settings Pins Jumped TAA to CA A 4 to 3 625 Loop Connected at User HSSI Connector Note TMI as shipped TA A amp C
267. use the CRS 280 70 140 MHz IF Switch for multiple transponder operation When you use the CRS 280L L Band IF Switch additional detailed installation cy information is provided in the CRS 280L 1 N Redundancy Switch Installation and Operation Manual CEFD P N MN CRS280L IOM Proceed with the transponder configuration method applicable to your system IF Cable Connections Single Transponder without CRS 280 280L To prevent problems resulting from impedance mismatch you must make sure that the impedance for the modem s cables and combiner are the same Referring to Figure 4 6 L Band operation shown For single transponder IF configurations connect the user provided IF cables gt For Transmit Tx IF Connections do these steps e Connect the appropriate user provided IF cables from each modem s Tx IF connector BNC for 70 140 MHz Type N for L Band to a single user provided power combiner e Connect the output of the power combiner to the user Upconverter gt For Receive Rx IF Connections do these steps e Connect the appropriate user provided cables from each modem s Rx IF connector BNC for 70 140 MHz Type N for L Band to the output ports of a single user provided splitter e Connect the input of the splitter to the output of the user Downconverter When a modem is taken offline its Tx IF is automatically muted shut down by the Switch CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM C
268. ute control line You must always use this cable See Figure 4 28 and Figure 4 29 and do these steps to connect and secure the CA WR12361 1 cables between the Switch and each CDM 710 e HD 15F connector labeled J1 on the Switch RMI or TMI s to e DB 15M connector labeled P1 Alarms on the CDM 710 Serial Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems If ASI is the traffic data type see Figure 4 28 and do these steps to connect and secure the pair of BNC PL 0813 8 cables between the Switch and each CDM 710 e BNCconnectors labeled JA Tx on the Switch RMI or J3 Tx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled Tx 14 on the CDM 710 s CDI 40 plug in module to e BNCconnectors labeled J3 Rx the Switch RMI J5 Rx on the Switch TMI s to BNC connectors labeled Rx J2 on the CDM 710 s CDI 40 plug in module If HSSI is the traffic data type see Figure 4 29 and do these steps to connect and secure the HSSI Data Cable CA WR9189 6 between the Switch and each CDM 710 e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J2 on the Switch RMI J3 on the Switch TMI s to e HSSI HD 50F connector labeled J1 HSSI on the CDM 710 s CDI 60 plug in module Ethernet Traffic Data Connections CRS 300 to Modems To handle Ethernet traffic data you must route the Ethernet data through the Switch like G 703 or HSSI data This method of processing data through the Switch is referred to as wired thru For detailed inform
269. value of Back up Hold Off time the Target responds with BKH xx where xx represents the time in seconds in question b Ifthe Controller sends a valid command to set a parameter to a particular value then the Target responds with BKH with no message arguments CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Serial based Remote Product Management Revision 19 Code Qualifier Description If the Controller sends an invalid command to set a parameter to a particular value then the Target responds with for example BKH with no ASCII code 63 message arguments This indicates that there was an error in the message sent by the Controller If the Controller sends a command that the Target does not recognize the Target responds by echoing the invalid instruction followed by the ASCII code 33 character For example XYZ If the Controller sends a command to set a parameter to a particular value and the value sent is valid BUT the modem will not permit that particular ASCII code 42 parameter to be changed at this time the Target responds with for example BKH with no message arguments If the Controller sends a correctly formatted command BUT the Target is in Local Mode it will not allow reconfiguration and responds with for ASCI code 35 example BKH with no message arguments e If a message was sent via the Switch to an attached modem or ODU the message was transmitted transparently through the Switch In the event of
270. vision 19 3 2 2 5 Balanced G 703 Connector DB 15F CRS 325 330 340 a CRS 325 TM See Table 3 8 for the pinout for the DB 15F Balanced G 703 User Data Interface connectors J6 on the CRS 325 TMI J1 on the CRS 330 TMI and J2 on the CRS 340 TMI Table 3 8 Balanced G 703 Connector Pin Signal Function Name Direction 8 Not Used 15 Not Used 7 Not Used 14 Not Used 6 Insert Data Input IDI In 13 Insert Data Input IDI In 5 Drop Data Output DDO Out 12 Drop Data Output DDO Out 4 Ground GND 11 Rx Insert Data Output IDO Out 3 Rx Insert Data Output IDO Out 10 Not Used 2 Ground GND 9 Tx Drop Data Input DDI In 1 Tx Drop Data Input DDI In Use for all non Drop and Insert and T2 E2 balanced applications CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Switch Connectors and Pinouts Revision 19 3 2 2 6 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors BNC CRS 325 330 340 us WE uS OUS m o 7 55 CRS 325 User Interface j On Une YS User Data interface mE EN EN E E These BNC female connectors provide the Unbalanced G 703 User Data Interface on the CRS 325 CRS 330 and CRS 340 TMs Table 3 9 Unbalanced G 703 Connectors TMI CRS 325 TMI CRS 330 TMI CRS 340 Ref Sianal Function come a Des Des g 42 Rx 00 6 703 e m A
271. warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty whichever is longer Contact Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased For equipment under warranty the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech EF Data and all related customs taxes tariffs insurance etc Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the owner Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method i e Air Express Surface as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number issued prior to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging Comtech EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original packaging Comtech EF Data Corporation s obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or replacement of failed parts and the return shipment to the buyer of the repaired or replaced parts Limitations of Warranty The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed altered repaired or misused in any way that in the opinion of Comtech EF Data Corporation would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any part of the product or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with equipment that had not been previously approved by Comtech EF Data Corporation xxii CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch
272. will need to re learn the correct port connection A 12 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy Switch MN CRS300 IOM Appendix A Revision 19 Note Traffic Modem 1 Learning Mode must be disabled CRS 300 Traffic Modem 1 O 1 166667 ommum Network Switch e Traffic Modem N TN M s 66627 mmm 57 With VLAN and Static ARP entries for the Tx modem Redundant Modem offline nm Note Redundant Modem Learning Mode must be disabled Network Router L7 or Switch Traffic Modem TuRX ENSE Network Router or Switch Traffic Modem TX RX P SSS ae ums 4 Figure A 14 Wired thru Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic Using Switches Point to Multipoint Note Traffic Modem 1 Learning Mode must be disabled Traffic Modem 1 QS er With VLAN and Static ARP entries for the Tx modem Traffic Modem N ieee Qe SS fed omm 1 Redundant Modem offline 34457 mmm Note Redundant Modem Learning Mode must be disabled or Switch Traffic Modem TX Rx aes mili um lt gt x Router Network or Switch Traffic Modem TXRx No 3 i PE m gt Figure A 15 Wired around Hub to Remotes Split path Traffic Using Switches Point to Multipoint A 13 CRS 300 1 10 Redundancy
273. yes to both questions for the entire backup holdoff time then the Switch first bridges the faulted modem with the Redundant Modem If the fault is sustained then the switchover to the Redundant Modem is completed and the Redundant Modem carries the traffic There will be no switchover if the Redundant Modem is faulted Make sure that the Holdoff times are long enough default 10 seconds for the Redundant Modem to be configured and to lock onto the signal If the CDM Qx QxL configuration includes Carrier in Carrier this holdoff time should be no less than 8 seconds Use the CRS 300 Front Panel menu to set the Backup Holdoff Period Do these steps Step Task 1 Use the keys to select the nested CONFIG OPTIONS gt HOLDOFFS menu 2 Change the BACKUP HOLDOFF to any number from 1 to 99 seconds 5 6 2 5 1 Set the Restore Holdoff Period The Restore Holdoff setting which is also programmable from 1 to 99 seconds determines the Switch s ability to automatically put a backed up Traffic Modem online again if its fault clears Normally a failed modem that is taken offline remains offline indefinitely If the fault clears traffic is returned to the unit in AUTO mode only if another Traffic Modem then fails If the fault on the originally failed modem has been clear for the full programmed Restore Holdoff time the Switch places that modem back online and bridges the newly faulted modem If the new fault is sustained the Redundan

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bedienungsanleitung / Kundendienstscheckheft  Original- Bedienungsanleitung  Samsung GT-E2121L Manual de Usuario  詳細データダウンロード（PDF:645KB）    セットアップマニュアル  Instructions d`installation  Samsung UE65H8000SZ 65" Full HD 3D compatibility Smart TV Wi-Fi Black, Silver  SERVICE MANUAL - Catering Equipment and Repairs  AMF Controller Be142 User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file